merge from 2.2
[Samba/gbeck.git] / docs / docbook / manpages / smb.conf.5.sgml
blob04b464e5ef9703a8b73abeecfd92598657597e8c
1 <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN">
2 <refentry id="smb.conf">
4 <refmeta>
5 <refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle>
6 <manvolnum>5</manvolnum>
7 </refmeta>
10 <refnamediv>
11 <refname>smb.conf</refname>
12 <refpurpose>The configuration file for the Samba suite</refpurpose>
13 </refnamediv>
15 <refsect1>
16 <title>SYNOPSIS</title>
18 <para>The <filename>smb.conf</filename> file is a configuration
19 file for the Samba suite. <filename>smb.conf</filename> contains
20 runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The
21 <filename>smb.conf</filename> file is designed to be configured and
22 administered by the <ulink url="swat.8.html"><command>swat(8)</command>
23 </ulink> program. The complete description of the file format and
24 possible parameters held within are here for reference purposes.</para>
25 </refsect1>
27 <refsect1>
28 <title id="FILEFORMATSECT">FILE FORMAT</title>
30 <para>The file consists of sections and parameters. A section
31 begins with the name of the section in square brackets and continues
32 until the next section begins. Sections contain parameters of the
33 form</para>
35 <para><replaceable>name</replaceable> = <replaceable>value
36 </replaceable></para>
38 <para>The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated
39 line represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter.</para>
41 <para>Section and parameter names are not case sensitive.</para>
43 <para>Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant.
44 Whitespace before or after the first equals sign is discarded.
45 Leading, trailing and internal whitespace in section and parameter
46 names is irrelevant. Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter
47 value is discarded. Internal whitespace within a parameter value
48 is retained verbatim.</para>
50 <para>Any line beginning with a semicolon (';') or a hash ('#')
51 character is ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace.</para>
53 <para>Any line ending in a '\' is continued
54 on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion.</para>
56 <para>The values following the equals sign in parameters are all
57 either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given
58 as yes/no, 0/1 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean
59 values, but is preserved in string values. Some items such as
60 create modes are numeric.</para>
61 </refsect1>
63 <refsect1>
64 <title>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</title>
66 <para>Each section in the configuration file (except for the
67 [global] section) describes a shared resource (known
68 as a "share"). The section name is the name of the
69 shared resource and the parameters within the section define
70 the shares attributes.</para>
72 <para>There are three special sections, [global],
73 [homes] and [printers], which are
74 described under <emphasis>special sections</emphasis>. The
75 following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions.</para>
77 <para>A share consists of a directory to which access is being
78 given plus a description of the access rights which are granted
79 to the user of the service. Some housekeeping options are
80 also specifiable.</para>
82 <para>Sections are either file share services (used by the
83 client as an extension of their native file systems) or
84 printable services (used by the client to access print services
85 on the host running the server).</para>
87 <para>Sections may be designated <emphasis>guest</emphasis> services,
88 in which case no password is required to access them. A specified
89 UNIX <emphasis>guest account</emphasis> is used to define access
90 privileges in this case.</para>
92 <para>Sections other than guest services will require a password
93 to access them. The client provides the username. As older clients
94 only provide passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list
95 of usernames to check against the password using the "user="
96 option in the share definition. For modern clients such as
97 Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000, this should not be necessary.</para>
99 <para>Note that the access rights granted by the server are
100 masked by the access rights granted to the specified or guest
101 UNIX user by the host system. The server does not grant more
102 access than the host system grants.</para>
104 <para>The following sample section defines a file space share.
105 The user has write access to the path <filename>/home/bar</filename>.
106 The share is accessed via the share name "foo":</para>
108 <screen>
109 <computeroutput>
110 [foo]
111 path = /home/bar
112 writeable = true
113 </computeroutput>
114 </screen>
116 <para>The following sample section defines a printable share.
117 The share is readonly, but printable. That is, the only write
118 access permitted is via calls to open, write to and close a
119 spool file. The <emphasis>guest ok</emphasis> parameter means
120 access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified
121 elsewhere):</para>
123 <screen>
124 <computeroutput>
125 [aprinter]
126 path = /usr/spool/public
127 writeable = false
128 printable = true
129 guest ok = true
130 </computeroutput>
131 </screen>
132 </refsect1>
134 <refsect1>
135 <title>SPECIAL SECTIONS</title>
137 <refsect2>
138 <title>The [global] section</title>
140 <para>parameters in this section apply to the server
141 as a whole, or are defaults for sections which do not
142 specifically define certain items. See the notes
143 under PARAMETERS for more information.</para>
144 </refsect2>
146 <refsect2>
147 <title id="HOMESECT">The [homes] section</title>
149 <para>If a section called homes is included in the
150 configuration file, services connecting clients to their
151 home directories can be created on the fly by the server.</para>
153 <para>When the connection request is made, the existing
154 sections are scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no
155 match is found, the requested section name is treated as a
156 user name and looked up in the local password file. If the
157 name exists and the correct password has been given, a share is
158 created by cloning the [homes] section.</para>
160 <para>Some modifications are then made to the newly
161 created share:</para>
163 <itemizedlist>
164 <listitem><para>The share name is changed from homes to
165 the located username.</para></listitem>
167 <listitem><para>If no path was given, the path is set to
168 the user's home directory.</para></listitem>
169 </itemizedlist>
171 <para>If you decide to use a <emphasis>path=</emphasis> line
172 in your [homes] section then you may find it useful
173 to use the %S macro. For example :</para>
175 <para><userinput>path=/data/pchome/%S</userinput></para>
177 <para>would be useful if you have different home directories
178 for your PCs than for UNIX access.</para>
180 <para>This is a fast and simple way to give a large number
181 of clients access to their home directories with a minimum
182 of fuss.</para>
184 <para>A similar process occurs if the requested section
185 name is "homes", except that the share name is not
186 changed to that of the requesting user. This method of using
187 the [homes] section works well if different users share
188 a client PC.</para>
190 <para>The [homes] section can specify all the parameters
191 a normal service section can specify, though some make more sense
192 than others. The following is a typical and suitable [homes]
193 section:</para>
195 <screen>
196 <computeroutput>
197 [homes]
198 writeable = yes
199 </computeroutput>
200 </screen>
202 <para>An important point is that if guest access is specified
203 in the [homes] section, all home directories will be
204 visible to all clients <emphasis>without a password</emphasis>.
205 In the very unlikely event that this is actually desirable, it
206 would be wise to also specify <emphasis>read only
207 access</emphasis>.</para>
209 <para>Note that the <emphasis>browseable</emphasis> flag for
210 auto home directories will be inherited from the global browseable
211 flag, not the [homes] browseable flag. This is useful as
212 it means setting browseable=no in the [homes] section
213 will hide the [homes] share but make any auto home
214 directories visible.</para>
215 </refsect2>
217 <refsect2>
218 <title id="PRINTERSSECT">The [printers] section</title>
220 <para>This section works like [homes],
221 but for printers.</para>
223 <para>If a [printers] section occurs in the
224 configuration file, users are able to connect to any printer
225 specified in the local host's printcap file.</para>
227 <para>When a connection request is made, the existing sections
228 are scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found,
229 but a [homes] section exists, it is used as described
230 above. Otherwise, the requested section name is treated as a
231 printer name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to see
232 if the requested section name is a valid printer share name. If
233 a match is found, a new printer share is created by cloning
234 the [printers] section.</para>
236 <para>A few modifications are then made to the newly created
237 share:</para>
239 <itemizedlist>
240 <listitem><para>The share name is set to the located printer
241 name</para></listitem>
243 <listitem><para>If no printer name was given, the printer name
244 is set to the located printer name</para></listitem>
246 <listitem><para>If the share does not permit guest access and
247 no username was given, the username is set to the located
248 printer name.</para></listitem>
249 </itemizedlist>
251 <para>Note that the [printers] service MUST be
252 printable - if you specify otherwise, the server will refuse
253 to load the configuration file.</para>
255 <para>Typically the path specified would be that of a
256 world-writeable spool directory with the sticky bit set on
257 it. A typical [printers] entry would look like
258 this:</para>
260 <screen><computeroutput>
261 [printers]
262 path = /usr/spool/public
263 guest ok = yes
264 printable = yes
265 </computeroutput></screen>
267 <para>All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file
268 are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned.
269 If your printing subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have
270 to set up a pseudo-printcap. This is a file consisting of one or
271 more lines like this:</para>
273 <screen>
274 <computeroutput>
275 alias|alias|alias|alias...
276 </computeroutput>
277 </screen>
279 <para>Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for
280 your printing subsystem. In the [global] section, specify
281 the new file as your printcap. The server will then only recognize
282 names found in your pseudo-printcap, which of course can contain
283 whatever aliases you like. The same technique could be used
284 simply to limit access to a subset of your local printers.</para>
286 <para>An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the
287 first entry of a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines,
288 components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical
289 bar symbols ('|').</para>
291 <para>NOTE: On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what
292 printers are defined on the system you may be able to use
293 "printcap name = lpstat" to automatically obtain a list
294 of printers. See the "printcap name" option
295 for more details.</para>
296 </refsect2>
297 </refsect1>
299 <refsect1>
300 <title>PARAMETERS</title>
302 <para>parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</para>
304 <para>Some parameters are specific to the [global] section
305 (e.g., <emphasis>security</emphasis>). Some parameters are usable
306 in all sections (e.g., <emphasis>create mode</emphasis>). All others
307 are permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the
308 following descriptions the [homes] and [printers]
309 sections will be considered normal. The letter <emphasis>G</emphasis>
310 in parentheses indicates that a parameter is specific to the
311 [global] section. The letter <emphasis>S</emphasis>
312 indicates that a parameter can be specified in a service specific
313 section. Note that all <emphasis>S</emphasis> parameters can also be specified in
314 the [global] section - in which case they will define
315 the default behavior for all services.</para>
317 <para>parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may
318 not create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where
319 there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer
320 to the preferred synonym.</para>
321 </refsect1>
323 <refsect1>
324 <title>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</title>
326 <para>Many of the strings that are settable in the config file
327 can take substitutions. For example the option "path =
328 /tmp/%u" would be interpreted as "path =
329 /tmp/john" if the user connected with the username john.</para>
331 <para>These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below,
332 but there are some general substitutions which apply whenever they
333 might be relevant. These are:</para>
335 <variablelist>
336 <varlistentry>
337 <term>%S</term>
338 <listitem><para>the name of the current service, if any.</para>
339 </listitem>
340 </varlistentry>
342 <varlistentry>
343 <term>%P</term>
344 <listitem><para>the root directory of the current service,
345 if any.</para></listitem>
346 </varlistentry>
348 <varlistentry>
349 <term>%u</term>
350 <listitem><para>user name of the current service, if any.</para>
351 </listitem>
352 </varlistentry>
354 <varlistentry>
355 <term>%g</term>
356 <listitem><para>primary group name of %u.</para></listitem>
357 </varlistentry>
359 <varlistentry>
360 <term>%U</term>
361 <listitem><para>session user name (the user name that the client
362 wanted, not necessarily the same as the one they got).</para></listitem>
363 </varlistentry>
365 <varlistentry>
366 <term>%G</term>
367 <listitem><para>primary group name of %U.</para></listitem>
368 </varlistentry>
370 <varlistentry>
371 <term>%H</term>
372 <listitem><para>the home directory of the user given
373 by %u.</para></listitem>
374 </varlistentry>
376 <varlistentry>
377 <term>%v</term>
378 <listitem><para>the Samba version.</para></listitem>
379 </varlistentry>
381 <varlistentry>
382 <term>%h</term>
383 <listitem><para>the Internet hostname that Samba is running
384 on.</para></listitem>
385 </varlistentry>
387 <varlistentry>
388 <term>%m</term>
389 <listitem><para>the NetBIOS name of the client machine
390 (very useful).</para></listitem>
391 </varlistentry>
393 <varlistentry>
394 <term>%L</term>
395 <listitem><para>the NetBIOS name of the server. This allows you
396 to change your config based on what the client calls you. Your
397 server can have a "dual personality".</para></listitem>
398 </varlistentry>
400 <varlistentry>
401 <term>%M</term>
402 <listitem><para>the Internet name of the client machine.
403 </para></listitem>
404 </varlistentry>
406 <varlistentry>
407 <term>%N</term>
408 <listitem><para>the name of your NIS home directory server.
409 This is obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. If you have
410 not compiled Samba with the <emphasis>--with-automount</emphasis>
411 option then this value will be the same as %.</para>
412 </listitem>
413 </varlistentry>
415 <varlistentry>
416 <term>%p</term>
417 <listitem><para>the path of the service's home directory,
418 obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. The NIS auto.map entry
419 is split up as "%N:%p".</para></listitem>
420 </varlistentry>
422 <varlistentry>
423 <term>%R</term>
424 <listitem><para>the selected protocol level after
425 protocol negotiation. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS,
426 LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1.</para></listitem>
427 </varlistentry>
429 <varlistentry>
430 <term>%d</term>
431 <listitem><para>The process id of the current server
432 process.</para></listitem>
433 </varlistentry>
435 <varlistentry>
436 <term>%a</term>
437 <listitem><para>the architecture of the remote
438 machine. Only some are recognized, and those may not be
439 100% reliable. It currently recognizes Samba, WfWg,
440 WinNT and Win95. Anything else will be known as
441 "UNKNOWN". If it gets it wrong then sending a level
442 3 log to <ulink url="mailto:samba@samba.org">samba@samba.org
443 </ulink> should allow it to be fixed.</para></listitem>
444 </varlistentry>
446 <varlistentry>
447 <term>%I</term>
448 <listitem><para>The IP address of the client machine.</para>
449 </listitem>
450 </varlistentry>
452 <varlistentry>
453 <term>%T</term>
454 <listitem><para>the current date and time.</para></listitem>
455 </varlistentry>
457 <varlistentry>
458 <term>%$(<replaceable>envvar</replaceable>)</term>
459 <listitem><para>The value of the environment variable
460 <replaceable>envar</replaceable>.</para></listitem>
461 </varlistentry>
462 </variablelist>
464 <para>There are some quite creative things that can be done
465 with these substitutions and other smb.conf options.</para
466 </refsect1>
468 <refsect1>
469 <title id="NAMEMANGLINGSECT">NAME MANGLING</title>
471 <para>Samba supports "name mangling" so that DOS and
472 Windows clients can use files that don't conform to the 8.3 format.
473 It can also be set to adjust the case of 8.3 format filenames.</para>
475 <para>There are several options that control the way mangling is
476 performed, and they are grouped here rather than listed separately.
477 For the defaults look at the output of the testparm program. </para>
479 <para>All of these options can be set separately for each service
480 (or globally, of course). </para>
482 <para>The options are: </para>
484 <variablelist>
486 <varlistentry>
487 <term>mangle case= yes/no</term>
488 <listitem><para> controls if names that have characters that
489 aren't of the "default" case are mangled. For example,
490 if this is yes then a name like "Mail" would be mangled.
491 Default <emphasis>no</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
492 </varlistentry>
494 <varlistentry>
495 <term>case sensitive = yes/no</term>
496 <listitem><para>controls whether filenames are case sensitive. If
497 they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and match on passed
498 names. Default <emphasis>no</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
499 </varlistentry>
501 <varlistentry>
502 <term>default case = upper/lower</term>
503 <listitem><para>controls what the default case is for new
504 filenames. Default <emphasis>lower</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
505 </varlistentry>
507 <varlistentry>
508 <term>preserve case = yes/no</term>
509 <listitem><para>controls if new files are created with the
510 case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the
511 "default" case. Default <emphasis>yes</emphasis>.
512 </para></listitem>
513 </varlistentry>
515 <varlistentry>
516 <term>short preserve case = yes/no</term>
517 <listitem><para>controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax,
518 that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created
519 upper case, or if they are forced to be the "default"
520 case. This option can be use with "preserve case = yes"
521 to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names
522 are lowered. Default <emphasis>yes</emphasis>.</para></listitem>
523 </varlistentry>
524 </variablelist>
526 <para>By default, Samba 2.2 has the same semantics as a Windows
527 NT server, in that it is case insensitive but case preserving.</para>
529 </refsect1>
531 <refsect1>
532 <title id="VALIDATIONSECT">NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</title>
534 <para>There are a number of ways in which a user can connect
535 to a service. The server uses the following steps in determining
536 if it will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the
537 steps fail, then the connection request is rejected. However, if one of the
538 steps succeeds, then the following steps are not checked.</para>
540 <para>If the service is marked "guest only = yes" then
541 steps 1 to 5 are skipped.</para>
543 <orderedlist numeration="Arabic">
544 <listitem><para>If the client has passed a username/password
545 pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX
546 system's password programs then the connection is made as that
547 username. Note that this includes the
548 \\server\service%<replaceable>username</replaceable> method of passing
549 a username.</para></listitem>
551 <listitem><para>If the client has previously registered a username
552 with the system and now supplies a correct password for that
553 username then the connection is allowed.</para></listitem>
555 <listitem><para>The client's netbios name and any previously
556 used user names are checked against the supplied password, if
557 they match then the connection is allowed as the corresponding
558 user.</para></listitem>
560 <listitem><para>If the client has previously validated a
561 username/password pair with the server and the client has passed
562 the validation token then that username is used. </para></listitem>
564 <listitem><para>If a "user = " field is given in the
565 <filename>smb.conf</filename> file for the service and the client
566 has supplied a password, and that password matches (according to
567 the UNIX system's password checking) with one of the usernames
568 from the "user=" field then the connection is made as
569 the username in the "user=" line. If one
570 of the username in the "user=" list begins with a
571 '@' then that name expands to a list of names in
572 the group of the same name.</para></listitem>
574 <listitem><para>If the service is a guest service then a
575 connection is made as the username given in the "guest
576 account =" for the service, irrespective of the
577 supplied password.</para></listitem>
578 </orderedlist>
580 </refsect1>
582 <refsect1>
583 <title>COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS</title>
585 <para>Here is a list of all global parameters. See the section of
586 each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.</para>
588 <itemizedlist>
589 <listitem><para><link linkend="ADDUSERSCRIPT"><parameter>add user script</parameter></link></para></listitem>
590 <listitem><para><link linkend="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"><parameter>addprinter command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
591 <listitem><para><link linkend="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS"><parameter>allow trusted domains</parameter></link></para></listitem>
592 <listitem><para><link linkend="ANNOUNCEAS"><parameter>announce as</parameter></link></para></listitem>
593 <listitem><para><link linkend="ANNOUNCEVERSION"><parameter>announce version</parameter></link></para></listitem>
594 <listitem><para><link linkend="AUTOSERVICES"><parameter>auto services</parameter></link></para></listitem>
595 <listitem><para><link linkend="BINDINTERFACESONLY"><parameter>bind interfaces only</parameter></link></para></listitem>
596 <listitem><para><link linkend="BROWSELIST"><parameter>browse list</parameter></link></para></listitem>
597 <listitem><para><link linkend="CHANGENOTIFYTIMEOUT"><parameter>change notify timeout</parameter></link></para></listitem>
598 <listitem><para><link linkend="CHARACTERSET"><parameter>character set</parameter></link></para></listitem>
599 <listitem><para><link linkend="CLIENTCODEPAGE"><parameter>client code page</parameter></link></para></listitem>
600 <listitem><para><link linkend="CODEPAGEDIRECTORY"><parameter>code page directory</parameter></link></para></listitem>
601 <listitem><para><link linkend="CODINGSYSTEM"><parameter>coding system</parameter></link></para></listitem>
602 <listitem><para><link linkend="CONFIGFILE"><parameter>config file</parameter></link></para></listitem>
603 <listitem><para><link linkend="DEADTIME"><parameter>deadtime</parameter></link></para></listitem>
604 <listitem><para><link linkend="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP"><parameter>debug hires timestamp</parameter></link></para></listitem>
605 <listitem><para><link linkend="DEBUGPID"><parameter>debug pid</parameter></link></para></listitem>
606 <listitem><para><link linkend="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"><parameter>debug timestamp</parameter></link></para></listitem>
607 <listitem><para><link linkend="DEBUGUID"><parameter>debug uid</parameter></link></para></listitem>
608 <listitem><para><link linkend="DEBUGLEVEL"><parameter>debuglevel</parameter></link></para></listitem>
609 <listitem><para><link linkend="DEFAULT"><parameter>default</parameter></link></para></listitem>
610 <listitem><para><link linkend="DEFAULTSERVICE"><parameter>default service</parameter></link></para></listitem>
611 <listitem><para><link linkend="DELETEUSERSCRIPT"><parameter>delete user script</parameter></link></para></listitem>
612 <listitem><para><link linkend="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"><parameter>deleteprinter command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
613 <listitem><para><link linkend="DFREECOMMAND"><parameter>dfree command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
614 <listitem><para><link linkend="DNSPROXY"><parameter>dns proxy</parameter></link></para></listitem>
615 <listitem><para><link linkend="DOMAINADMINGROUP"><parameter>domain admin group</parameter></link></para></listitem>
616 <listitem><para><link linkend="DOMAINADMINUSERS"><parameter>domain admin users</parameter></link></para></listitem>
617 <listitem><para><link linkend="DOMAINGROUPS"><parameter>domain groups</parameter></link></para></listitem>
618 <listitem><para><link linkend="DOMAINGUESTGROUP"><parameter>domain guest group</parameter></link></para></listitem>
619 <listitem><para><link linkend="DOMAINGUESTUSERS"><parameter>domain guest users</parameter></link></para></listitem>
620 <listitem><para><link linkend="DOMAINLOGONS"><parameter>domain logons</parameter></link></para></listitem>
621 <listitem><para><link linkend="DOMAINMASTER"><parameter>domain master</parameter></link></para></listitem>
622 <listitem><para><link linkend="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"><parameter>encrypt passwords</parameter></link></para></listitem>
623 <listitem><para><link linkend="ENHANCEDBROWSING"><parameter>enhanced browsing</parameter></link></para></listitem>
624 <listitem><para><link linkend="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"><parameter>enumports command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
625 <listitem><para><link linkend="GETWDCACHE"><parameter>getwd cache</parameter></link></para></listitem>
626 <listitem><para><link linkend="HIDELOCALUSERS"><parameter>hide local users</parameter></link></para></listitem>
627 <listitem><para><link linkend="HOMEDIRMAP"><parameter>homedir map</parameter></link></para></listitem>
628 <listitem><para><link linkend="HOSTMSDFS"><parameter>host msdfs</parameter></link></para></listitem>
629 <listitem><para><link linkend="HOSTSEQUIV"><parameter>hosts equiv</parameter></link></para></listitem>
630 <listitem><para><link linkend="INTERFACES"><parameter>interfaces</parameter></link></para></listitem>
631 <listitem><para><link linkend="KEEPALIVE"><parameter>keepalive</parameter></link></para></listitem>
632 <listitem><para><link linkend="KERNELOPLOCKS"><parameter>kernel oplocks</parameter></link></para></listitem>
633 <listitem><para><link linkend="LANMANAUTH"><parameter>lanman auth</parameter></link></para></listitem>
634 <listitem><para><link linkend="LMANNOUNCE"><parameter>lm announce</parameter></link></para></listitem>
635 <listitem><para><link linkend="LMINTERVAL"><parameter>lm interval</parameter></link></para></listitem>
636 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOADPRINTERS"><parameter>load printers</parameter></link></para></listitem>
637 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOCALMASTER"><parameter>local master</parameter></link></para></listitem>
638 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOCKDIR"><parameter>lock dir</parameter></link></para></listitem>
639 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOCKDIRECTORY"><parameter>lock directory</parameter></link></para></listitem>
640 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOGFILE"><parameter>log file</parameter></link></para></listitem>
641 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOGLEVEL"><parameter>log level</parameter></link></para></listitem>
642 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOGONDRIVE"><parameter>logon drive</parameter></link></para></listitem>
643 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOGONHOME"><parameter>logon home</parameter></link></para></listitem>
644 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOGONPATH"><parameter>logon path</parameter></link></para></listitem>
645 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOGONSCRIPT"><parameter>logon script</parameter></link></para></listitem>
646 <listitem><para><link linkend="LPQCACHETIME"><parameter>lpq cache time</parameter></link></para></listitem>
647 <listitem><para><link linkend="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"><parameter>machine password timeout</parameter></link></para></listitem>
648 <listitem><para><link linkend="MANGLEDSTACK"><parameter>mangled stack</parameter></link></para></listitem>
649 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAPTOGUEST"><parameter>map to guest</parameter></link></para></listitem>
650 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXDISKSIZE"><parameter>max disk size</parameter></link></para></listitem>
651 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXLOGSIZE"><parameter>max log size</parameter></link></para></listitem>
652 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXMUX"><parameter>max mux</parameter></link></para></listitem>
653 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXOPENFILES"><parameter>max open files</parameter></link></para></listitem>
654 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXPROTOCOL"><parameter>max protocol</parameter></link></para></listitem>
655 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"><parameter>max smbd processes</parameter></link></para></listitem>
656 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXTTL"><parameter>max ttl</parameter></link></para></listitem>
657 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXWINSTTL"><parameter>max wins ttl</parameter></link></para></listitem>
658 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXXMIT"><parameter>max xmit</parameter></link></para></listitem>
659 <listitem><para><link linkend="MESSAGECOMMAND"><parameter>message command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
660 <listitem><para><link linkend="MINPASSWDLENGTH"><parameter>min passwd length</parameter></link></para></listitem>
661 <listitem><para><link linkend="MINPASSWORDLENGTH"><parameter>min password length</parameter></link></para></listitem>
662 <listitem><para><link linkend="MINPROTOCOL"><parameter>min protocol</parameter></link></para></listitem>
663 <listitem><para><link linkend="MINWINSTTL"><parameter>min wins ttl</parameter></link></para></listitem>
664 <listitem><para><link linkend="NAMERESOLVEORDER"><parameter>name resolve order</parameter></link></para></listitem>
665 <listitem><para><link linkend="NETBIOSALIASES"><parameter>netbios aliases</parameter></link></para></listitem>
666 <listitem><para><link linkend="NETBIOSNAME"><parameter>netbios name</parameter></link></para></listitem>
667 <listitem><para><link linkend="NETBIOSSCOPE"><parameter>netbios scope</parameter></link></para></listitem>
668 <listitem><para><link linkend="NISHOMEDIR"><parameter>nis homedir</parameter></link></para></listitem>
669 <listitem><para><link linkend="NTACLSUPPORT"><parameter>nt acl support</parameter></link></para></listitem>
670 <listitem><para><link linkend="NTPIPESUPPORT"><parameter>nt pipe support</parameter></link></para></listitem>
671 <listitem><para><link linkend="NTSMBSUPPORT"><parameter>nt smb support</parameter></link></para></listitem>
672 <listitem><para><link linkend="NULLPASSWORDS"><parameter>null passwords</parameter></link></para></listitem>
673 <listitem><para><link linkend="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"><parameter>oplock break wait time</parameter></link></para></listitem>
674 <listitem><para><link linkend="OSLEVEL"><parameter>os level</parameter></link></para></listitem>
675 <listitem><para><link linkend="OS2DRIVERMAP"><parameter>os2 driver map</parameter></link></para></listitem>
676 <listitem><para><link linkend="PANICACTION"><parameter>panic action</parameter></link></para></listitem>
677 <listitem><para><link linkend="PASSWDCHAT"><parameter>passwd chat</parameter></link></para></listitem>
678 <listitem><para><link linkend="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"><parameter>passwd chat debug</parameter></link></para></listitem>
679 <listitem><para><link linkend="PASSWDPROGRAM"><parameter>passwd program</parameter></link></para></listitem>
680 <listitem><para><link linkend="PASSWORDLEVEL"><parameter>password level</parameter></link></para></listitem>
681 <listitem><para><link linkend="PASSWORDSERVER"><parameter>password server</parameter></link></para></listitem>
682 <listitem><para><link linkend="PREFEREDMASTER"><parameter>prefered master</parameter></link></para></listitem>
683 <listitem><para><link linkend="PREFERREDMASTER"><parameter>preferred master</parameter></link></para></listitem>
684 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRELOAD"><parameter>preload</parameter></link></para></listitem>
685 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTCAP"><parameter>printcap</parameter></link></para></listitem>
686 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTCAPNAME"><parameter>printcap name</parameter></link></para></listitem>
687 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTERDRIVERFILE"><parameter>printer driver file</parameter></link></para></listitem>
688 <listitem><para><link linkend="PROTOCOL"><parameter>protocol</parameter></link></para></listitem>
689 <listitem><para><link linkend="READBMPX"><parameter>read bmpx</parameter></link></para></listitem>
690 <listitem><para><link linkend="READRAW"><parameter>read raw</parameter></link></para></listitem>
691 <listitem><para><link linkend="READSIZE"><parameter>read size</parameter></link></para></listitem>
692 <listitem><para><link linkend="REMOTEANNOUNCE"><parameter>remote announce</parameter></link></para></listitem>
693 <listitem><para><link linkend="REMOTEBROWSESYNC"><parameter>remote browse sync</parameter></link></para></listitem>
694 <listitem><para><link linkend="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"><parameter>restrict anonymous</parameter></link></para></listitem>
695 <listitem><para><link linkend="ROOT"><parameter>root</parameter></link></para></listitem>
696 <listitem><para><link linkend="ROOTDIR"><parameter>root dir</parameter></link></para></listitem>
697 <listitem><para><link linkend="ROOTDIRECTORY"><parameter>root directory</parameter></link></para></listitem>
698 <listitem><para><link linkend="SECURITY"><parameter>security</parameter></link></para></listitem>
699 <listitem><para><link linkend="SERVERSTRING"><parameter>server string</parameter></link></para></listitem>
700 <listitem><para><link linkend="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"><parameter>show add printer wizard</parameter></link></para></listitem>
701 <listitem><para><link linkend="SMBPASSWDFILE"><parameter>smb passwd file</parameter></link></para></listitem>
702 <listitem><para><link linkend="SOCKETADDRESS"><parameter>socket address</parameter></link></para></listitem>
703 <listitem><para><link linkend="SOCKETOPTIONS"><parameter>socket options</parameter></link></para></listitem>
704 <listitem><para><link linkend="SOURCEENVIRONMENT"><parameter>source environment</parameter></link></para></listitem>
705 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSL"><parameter>ssl</parameter></link></para></listitem>
706 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLCACERTDIR"><parameter>ssl CA certDir</parameter></link></para></listitem>
707 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLCACERTFILE"><parameter>ssl CA certFile</parameter></link></para></listitem>
708 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLCIPHERS"><parameter>ssl ciphers</parameter></link></para></listitem>
709 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLCLIENTCERT"><parameter>ssl client cert</parameter></link></para></listitem>
710 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLCLIENTKEY"><parameter>ssl client key</parameter></link></para></listitem>
711 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLCOMPATIBILITY"><parameter>ssl compatibility</parameter></link></para></listitem>
712 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLHOSTS"><parameter>ssl hosts</parameter></link></para></listitem>
713 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLHOSTSRESIGN"><parameter>ssl hosts resign</parameter></link></para></listitem>
714 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT"><parameter>ssl require clientcert</parameter></link></para></listitem>
715 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLREQUIRESERVERCERT"><parameter>ssl require servercert</parameter></link></para></listitem>
716 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLSERVERCERT"><parameter>ssl server cert</parameter></link></para></listitem>
717 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLSERVERKEY"><parameter>ssl server key</parameter></link></para></listitem>
718 <listitem><para><link linkend="SSLVERSION"><parameter>ssl version</parameter></link></para></listitem>
719 <listitem><para><link linkend="STATCACHE"><parameter>stat cache</parameter></link></para></listitem>
720 <listitem><para><link linkend="STATCACHESIZE"><parameter>stat cache size</parameter></link></para></listitem>
721 <listitem><para><link linkend="STRIPDOT"><parameter>strip dot</parameter></link></para></listitem>
722 <listitem><para><link linkend="SYSLOG"><parameter>syslog</parameter></link></para></listitem>
723 <listitem><para><link linkend="SYSLOGONLY"><parameter>syslog only</parameter></link></para></listitem>
724 <listitem><para><link linkend="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"><parameter>template homedir</parameter></link></para></listitem>
725 <listitem><para><link linkend="TEMPLATESHELL"><parameter>template shell</parameter></link></para></listitem>
726 <listitem><para><link linkend="TIMEOFFSET"><parameter>time offset</parameter></link></para></listitem>
727 <listitem><para><link linkend="TIMESERVER"><parameter>time server</parameter></link></para></listitem>
728 <listitem><para><link linkend="TIMESTAMPLOGS"><parameter>timestamp logs</parameter></link></para></listitem>
729 <listitem><para><link linkend="TOTALPRINTJOBS"><parameter>total print jobs</parameter></link></para></listitem>
730 <listitem><para><link linkend="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"><parameter>unix password sync</parameter></link></para></listitem>
731 <listitem><para><link linkend="UPDATEENCRYPTED"><parameter>update encrypted</parameter></link></para></listitem>
732 <listitem><para><link linkend="USERHOSTS"><parameter>use rhosts</parameter></link></para></listitem>
733 <listitem><para><link linkend="USERNAMELEVEL"><parameter>username level</parameter></link></para></listitem>
734 <listitem><para><link linkend="USERNAMEMAP"><parameter>username map</parameter></link></para></listitem>
735 <listitem><para><link linkend="UTMPDIRECTORY"><parameter>utmp directory</parameter></link></para></listitem>
736 <listitem><para><link linkend="VALIDCHARS"><parameter>valid chars</parameter></link></para></listitem>
737 <listitem><para><link linkend="WINBINDCACHETIME"><parameter>winbind cache time</parameter></link></para></listitem>
738 <listitem><para><link linkend="WINBINDGID"><parameter>winbind gid</parameter></link></para></listitem>
739 <listitem><para><link linkend="WINBINDSEPARATOR"><parameter>winbind separator</parameter></link></para></listitem>
740 <listitem><para><link linkend="WINBINDUID"><parameter>winbind uid</parameter></link></para></listitem>
741 <listitem><para><link linkend="WINSHOOK"><parameter>wins hook</parameter></link></para></listitem>
742 <listitem><para><link linkend="WINSPROXY"><parameter>wins proxy</parameter></link></para></listitem>
743 <listitem><para><link linkend="WINSSERVER"><parameter>wins server</parameter></link></para></listitem>
744 <listitem><para><link linkend="WINSSUPPORT"><parameter>wins support</parameter></link></para></listitem>
745 <listitem><para><link linkend="WORKGROUP"><parameter>workgroup</parameter></link></para></listitem>
746 <listitem><para><link linkend="WRITERAW"><parameter>write raw</parameter></link></para></listitem>
747 </itemizedlist>
749 </refsect1>
751 <refsect1>
752 <title>COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS</title>
754 <para>Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section on
755 each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.</para>
757 <itemizedlist>
758 <listitem><para><link linkend="ADMINUSERS"><parameter>admin users</parameter></link></para></listitem>
759 <listitem><para><link linkend="ALLOWHOSTS"><parameter>allow hosts</parameter></link></para></listitem>
760 <listitem><para><link linkend="AVAILABLE"><parameter>available</parameter></link></para></listitem>
761 <listitem><para><link linkend="BLOCKINGLOCKS"><parameter>blocking locks</parameter></link></para></listitem>
762 <listitem><para><link linkend="BROWSABLE"><parameter>browsable</parameter></link></para></listitem>
763 <listitem><para><link linkend="BROWSEABLE"><parameter>browseable</parameter></link></para></listitem>
764 <listitem><para><link linkend="CASESENSITIVE"><parameter>case sensitive</parameter></link></para></listitem>
765 <listitem><para><link linkend="CASESIGNAMES"><parameter>casesignames</parameter></link></para></listitem>
766 <listitem><para><link linkend="COMMENT"><parameter>comment</parameter></link></para></listitem>
767 <listitem><para><link linkend="COPY"><parameter>copy</parameter></link></para></listitem>
768 <listitem><para><link linkend="CREATEMASK"><parameter>create mask</parameter></link></para></listitem>
769 <listitem><para><link linkend="CREATEMODE"><parameter>create mode</parameter></link></para></listitem>
770 <listitem><para><link linkend="DEFAULTCASE"><parameter>default case</parameter></link></para></listitem>
771 <listitem><para><link linkend="DELETEREADONLY"><parameter>delete readonly</parameter></link></para></listitem>
772 <listitem><para><link linkend="DELETEVETOFILES"><parameter>delete veto files</parameter></link></para></listitem>
773 <listitem><para><link linkend="DENYHOSTS"><parameter>deny hosts</parameter></link></para></listitem>
774 <listitem><para><link linkend="DIRECTORY"><parameter>directory</parameter></link></para></listitem>
775 <listitem><para><link linkend="DIRECTORYMASK"><parameter>directory mask</parameter></link></para></listitem>
776 <listitem><para><link linkend="DIRECTORYMODE"><parameter>directory mode</parameter></link></para></listitem>
777 <listitem><para><link linkend="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"><parameter>directory security mask</parameter></link></para></listitem>
778 <listitem><para><link linkend="DONTDESCEND"><parameter>dont descend</parameter></link></para></listitem>
779 <listitem><para><link linkend="DOSFILEMODE"><parameter>dos filemode</parameter></link></para></listitem>
780 <listitem><para><link linkend="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION"><parameter>dos filetime resolution</parameter></link></para></listitem>
781 <listitem><para><link linkend="DOSFILETIMES"><parameter>dos filetimes</parameter></link></para></listitem>
782 <listitem><para><link linkend="EXEC"><parameter>exec</parameter></link></para></listitem>
783 <listitem><para><link linkend="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES"><parameter>fake directory create times</parameter></link></para></listitem>
784 <listitem><para><link linkend="FAKEOPLOCKS"><parameter>fake oplocks</parameter></link></para></listitem>
785 <listitem><para><link linkend="FOLLOWSYMLINKS"><parameter>follow symlinks</parameter></link></para></listitem>
786 <listitem><para><link linkend="FORCECREATEMODE"><parameter>force create mode</parameter></link></para></listitem>
787 <listitem><para><link linkend="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"><parameter>force directory mode</parameter></link></para></listitem>
788 <listitem><para><link linkend="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"><parameter>force directory security mode</parameter></link></para></listitem>
789 <listitem><para><link linkend="FORCEGROUP"><parameter>force group</parameter></link></para></listitem>
790 <listitem><para><link linkend="FORCESECURITYMODE"><parameter>force security mode</parameter></link></para></listitem>
791 <listitem><para><link linkend="FORCEUSER"><parameter>force user</parameter></link></para></listitem>
792 <listitem><para><link linkend="FSTYPE"><parameter>fstype</parameter></link></para></listitem>
793 <listitem><para><link linkend="GROUP"><parameter>group</parameter></link></para></listitem>
794 <listitem><para><link linkend="GUESTACCOUNT"><parameter>guest account</parameter></link></para></listitem>
795 <listitem><para><link linkend="GUESTOK"><parameter>guest ok</parameter></link></para></listitem>
796 <listitem><para><link linkend="GUESTONLY"><parameter>guest only</parameter></link></para></listitem>
797 <listitem><para><link linkend="HIDEDOTFILES"><parameter>hide dot files</parameter></link></para></listitem>
798 <listitem><para><link linkend="HIDEFILES"><parameter>hide files</parameter></link></para></listitem>
799 <listitem><para><link linkend="HOSTSALLOW"><parameter>hosts allow</parameter></link></para></listitem>
800 <listitem><para><link linkend="HOSTSDENY"><parameter>hosts deny</parameter></link></para></listitem>
801 <listitem><para><link linkend="INCLUDE"><parameter>include</parameter></link></para></listitem>
802 <listitem><para><link linkend="INHERITPERMISSIONS"><parameter>inherit permissions</parameter></link></para></listitem>
803 <listitem><para><link linkend="INVALIDUSERS"><parameter>invalid users</parameter></link></para></listitem>
804 <listitem><para><link linkend="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"><parameter>level2 oplocks</parameter></link></para></listitem>
805 <listitem><para><link linkend="LOCKING"><parameter>locking</parameter></link></para></listitem>
806 <listitem><para><link linkend="LPPAUSECOMMAND"><parameter>lppause command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
807 <listitem><para><link linkend="LPQCOMMAND"><parameter>lpq command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
808 <listitem><para><link linkend="LPRESUMECOMMAND"><parameter>lpresume command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
809 <listitem><para><link linkend="LPRMCOMMAND"><parameter>lprm command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
810 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAGICOUTPUT"><parameter>magic output</parameter></link></para></listitem>
811 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAGICSCRIPT"><parameter>magic script</parameter></link></para></listitem>
812 <listitem><para><link linkend="MANGLECASE"><parameter>mangle case</parameter></link></para></listitem>
813 <listitem><para><link linkend="MANGLEDMAP"><parameter>mangled map</parameter></link></para></listitem>
814 <listitem><para><link linkend="MANGLEDNAMES"><parameter>mangled names</parameter></link></para></listitem>
815 <listitem><para><link linkend="MANGLINGCHAR"><parameter>mangling char</parameter></link></para></listitem>
816 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAPARCHIVE"><parameter>map archive</parameter></link></para></listitem>
817 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAPHIDDEN"><parameter>map hidden</parameter></link></para></listitem>
818 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAPSYSTEM"><parameter>map system</parameter></link></para></listitem>
819 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXCONNECTIONS"><parameter>max connections</parameter></link></para></listitem>
820 <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXPRINTJOBS"><parameter>max print jobs</parameter></link></para></listitem>
821 <listitem><para><link linkend="MINPRINTSPACE"><parameter>min print space</parameter></link></para></listitem>
822 <listitem><para><link linkend="MSDFSROOT"><parameter>msdfs root</parameter></link></para></listitem>
823 <listitem><para><link linkend="ONLYGUEST"><parameter>only guest</parameter></link></para></listitem>
824 <listitem><para><link linkend="ONLYUSER"><parameter>only user</parameter></link></para></listitem>
825 <listitem><para><link linkend="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"><parameter>oplock contention limit</parameter></link></para></listitem>
826 <listitem><para><link linkend="OPLOCKS"><parameter>oplocks</parameter></link></para></listitem>
827 <listitem><para><link linkend="PATH"><parameter>path</parameter></link></para></listitem>
828 <listitem><para><link linkend="POSIXLOCKING"><parameter>posix locking</parameter></link></para></listitem>
829 <listitem><para><link linkend="POSTEXEC"><parameter>postexec</parameter></link></para></listitem>
830 <listitem><para><link linkend="POSTSCRIPT"><parameter>postscript</parameter></link></para></listitem>
831 <listitem><para><link linkend="PREEXEC"><parameter>preexec</parameter></link></para></listitem>
832 <listitem><para><link linkend="PREEXECCLOSE"><parameter>preexec close</parameter></link></para></listitem>
833 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRESERVECASE"><parameter>preserve case</parameter></link></para></listitem>
834 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTCOMMAND"><parameter>print command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
835 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTOK"><parameter>print ok</parameter></link></para></listitem>
836 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTABLE"><parameter>printable</parameter></link></para></listitem>
837 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTER"><parameter>printer</parameter></link></para></listitem>
838 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTERADMIN"><parameter>printer admin</parameter></link></para></listitem>
839 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTERDRIVER"><parameter>printer driver</parameter></link></para></listitem>
840 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION"><parameter>printer driver location</parameter></link></para></listitem>
841 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTERNAME"><parameter>printer name</parameter></link></para></listitem>
842 <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing</parameter></link></para></listitem>
843 <listitem><para><link linkend="PUBLIC"><parameter>public</parameter></link></para></listitem>
844 <listitem><para><link linkend="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"><parameter>queuepause command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
845 <listitem><para><link linkend="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"><parameter>queueresume command</parameter></link></para></listitem>
846 <listitem><para><link linkend="READLIST"><parameter>read list</parameter></link></para></listitem>
847 <listitem><para><link linkend="READONLY"><parameter>read only</parameter></link></para></listitem>
848 <listitem><para><link linkend="ROOTPOSTEXEC"><parameter>root postexec</parameter></link></para></listitem>
849 <listitem><para><link linkend="ROOTPREEXEC"><parameter>root preexec</parameter></link></para></listitem>
850 <listitem><para><link linkend="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"><parameter>root preexec close</parameter></link></para></listitem>
851 <listitem><para><link linkend="SECURITYMASK"><parameter>security mask</parameter></link></para></listitem>
852 <listitem><para><link linkend="SETDIRECTORY"><parameter>set directory</parameter></link></para></listitem>
853 <listitem><para><link linkend="SHAREMODES"><parameter>share modes</parameter></link></para></listitem>
854 <listitem><para><link linkend="SHORTPRESERVECASE"><parameter>short preserve case</parameter></link></para></listitem>
855 <listitem><para><link linkend="STATUS"><parameter>status</parameter></link></para></listitem>
856 <listitem><para><link linkend="STRICTLOCKING"><parameter>strict locking</parameter></link></para></listitem>
857 <listitem><para><link linkend="STRICTSYNC"><parameter>strict sync</parameter></link></para></listitem>
858 <listitem><para><link linkend="SYNCALWAYS"><parameter>sync always</parameter></link></para></listitem>
859 <listitem><para><link linkend="USER"><parameter>user</parameter></link></para></listitem>
860 <listitem><para><link linkend="USERNAME"><parameter>username</parameter></link></para></listitem>
861 <listitem><para><link linkend="USERS"><parameter>users</parameter></link></para></listitem>
862 <listitem><para><link linkend="UTMP"><parameter>utmp</parameter></link></para></listitem>
863 <listitem><para><link linkend="VALIDUSERS"><parameter>valid users</parameter></link></para></listitem>
864 <listitem><para><link linkend="VETOFILES"><parameter>veto files</parameter></link></para></listitem>
865 <listitem><para><link linkend="VETOOPLOCKFILES"><parameter>veto oplock files</parameter></link></para></listitem>
866 <listitem><para><link linkend="VFSOBJECT"><parameter>vfs object</parameter></link></para></listitem>
867 <listitem><para><link linkend="VFSOPTIONS"><parameter>vfs options</parameter></link></para></listitem>
868 <listitem><para><link linkend="VOLUME"><parameter>volume</parameter></link></para></listitem>
869 <listitem><para><link linkend="WIDELINKS"><parameter>wide links</parameter></link></para></listitem>
870 <listitem><para><link linkend="WRITABLE"><parameter>writable</parameter></link></para></listitem>
871 <listitem><para><link linkend="WRITECACHESIZE"><parameter>write cache size</parameter></link></para></listitem>
872 <listitem><para><link linkend="WRITELIST"><parameter>write list</parameter></link></para></listitem>
873 <listitem><para><link linkend="WRITEOK"><parameter>write ok</parameter></link></para></listitem>
874 <listitem><para><link linkend="WRITEABLE"><parameter>writeable</parameter></link></para></listitem>
875 </itemizedlist>
877 </refsect1>
879 <refsect1>
880 <title>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</title>
882 <variablelist>
884 <varlistentry>
885 <term><anchor id="ADDUSERSCRIPT">add user script (G)</term>
886 <listitem><para>This is the full pathname to a script that will
887 be run <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis> by <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)
888 </ulink> under special circumstances described below.</para>
890 <para>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are
891 created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites
892 that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database
893 creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the
894 Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <ulink
895 url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> to create the required UNIX users
896 <emphasis>ON DEMAND</emphasis> when a user accesses the Samba server.</para>
898 <para>In order to use this option, <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink>
899 must be set to <parameter>security=server</parameter> or <parameter>
900 security=domain</parameter> and <parameter>add user script</parameter>
901 must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX
902 user given one argument of <parameter>%u</parameter>, which expands into
903 the UNIX user name to create.</para>
905 <para>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server,
906 at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, <ulink url="smbd.8.html">
907 smbd</ulink> contacts the <parameter>password server</parameter> and
908 attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the
909 authentication succeeds then <command>smbd</command>
910 attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the
911 Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and <parameter>add user script
912 </parameter> is set then <command>smbd</command> will
913 call the specified script <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis>, expanding
914 any <parameter>%u</parameter> argument to be the user name to create.</para>
916 <para>If this script successfully creates the user then <command>smbd
917 </command> will continue on as though the UNIX user
918 already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to
919 match existing Windows NT accounts.</para>
921 <para>See also <link linkend="SECURITY"><parameter>
922 security</parameter></link>, <link linkend="PASSWORDSERVER">
923 <parameter>password server</parameter></link>,
924 <link linkend="DELETEUSERSCRIPT"><parameter>delete user
925 script</parameter></link>.</para>
927 <para>Default: <command>add user script = &lt;empty string&gt;
928 </command></para>
930 <para>Example: <command>add user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user
931 %u</command></para>
932 </listitem>
933 </varlistentry>
937 <varlistentry>
938 <term><anchor id="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND">addprinter command (G)</term>
939 <listitem><para>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing
940 support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add
941 Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the
942 "Printers..." folder displayed a share listing. The APW
943 allows for printers to be add remotely to a Samba or Windows
944 NT/2000 print server.</para>
946 <para>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be
947 physically added to underlying printing system. The <parameter>
948 addprinter command</parameter> defines a script to be run which
949 will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer
950 to the print system and to add the appropriate service definition
951 to the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file in order that it can be
952 shared by <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command>
953 </ulink>.</para>
955 <para>The <parameter>addprinter command</parameter> is
956 automatically invoked with the following parameter (in
957 order:</para>
959 <itemizedlist>
960 <listitem><para><parameter>printer name</parameter></para></listitem>
961 <listitem><para><parameter>share name</parameter></para></listitem>
962 <listitem><para><parameter>port name</parameter></para></listitem>
963 <listitem><para><parameter>driver name</parameter></para></listitem>
964 <listitem><para><parameter>location</parameter></para></listitem>
965 <listitem><para><parameter>Windows 9x driver location</parameter>
966 </para></listitem>
967 </itemizedlist>
969 <para>All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent
970 by the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception. The "Windows 9x
971 driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility
972 only. The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers
973 to the APW questions.</para>
975 <para>Once the <parameter>addprinter command</parameter> has
976 been executed, <command>smbd</command> will reparse the <filename>
977 smb.conf</filename> to determine if the share defined by the APW
978 exists. If the sharename is still invalid, then <command>smbd
979 </command> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</para>
981 <para>See also <link linkend="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"><parameter>
982 deleteprinter command</parameter></link>, <link
983 linkend="printing"><parameter>printing</parameter></link>,
984 <link linkend="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"><parameter>show add
985 printer wizard</parameter></link></para>
987 <para>Default: <emphasis>none</emphasis></para>
988 <para>Example: <command>addprinter command = /usr/bin/addprinter
989 </command></para>
990 </listitem>
991 </varlistentry>
994 <varlistentry>
995 <term><anchor id="ADMINUSERS">admin users (S)</term>
996 <listitem><para>This is a list of users who will be granted
997 administrative privileges on the share. This means that they
998 will do all file operations as the super-user (root).</para>
1000 <para>You should use this option very carefully, as any user in
1001 this list will be able to do anything they like on the share,
1002 irrespective of file permissions.</para>
1004 <para>Default: <emphasis>no admin users</emphasis></para>
1006 <para>Example: <command>admin users = jason</command></para>
1007 </listitem>
1008 </varlistentry>
1012 <varlistentry>
1013 <term><anchor id="ALLOWHOSTS">allow hosts (S)</term>
1014 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="HOSTSALLOW">
1015 <parameter>hosts allow</parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
1016 </varlistentry>
1020 <varlistentry>
1021 <term><anchor id="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS">allow trusted domains (G)</term>
1022 <listitem><para>This option only takes effect when the <link
1023 linkend="SECURITY"><parameter>security</parameter></link> option is set to
1024 <constant>server</constant> or <constant>domain</constant>.
1025 If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from
1026 a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbd is running
1027 in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the remote server
1028 doing the authentication.</para>
1030 <para>This is useful if you only want your Samba server to
1031 serve resources to users in the domain it is a member of. As
1032 an example, suppose that there are two domains DOMA and DOMB. DOMB
1033 is trusted by DOMA, which contains the Samba server. Under normal
1034 circumstances, a user with an account in DOMB can then access the
1035 resources of a UNIX account with the same account name on the
1036 Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA. This
1037 can make implementing a security boundary difficult.</para>
1039 <para>Default: <command>allow trusted domains = yes</command></para>
1041 </listitem>
1042 </varlistentry>
1046 <varlistentry>
1047 <term><anchor id="ANNOUNCEAS">announce as (G)</term>
1048 <listitem><para>This specifies what type of server
1049 <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command>nmbd</command></ulink>
1050 will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse
1051 list. By default this is set to Windows NT. The valid options
1052 are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"),
1053 "NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server,
1054 Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups
1055 respectively. Do not change this parameter unless you have a
1056 specific need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server as this
1057 may prevent Samba servers from participating as browser servers
1058 correctly.</para>
1060 <para>Default: <command>announce as = NT Server</command></para>
1062 <para>Example: <command>announce as = Win95</command></para>
1063 </listitem>
1064 </varlistentry>
1068 <varlistentry>
1069 <term><anchor id="ANNOUNCEVERSION">annouce version (G)</term>
1070 <listitem><para>This specifies the major and minor version numbers
1071 that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server. The default
1072 is 4.2. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific
1073 need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server.</para>
1075 <para>Default: <command>announce version = 4.2</command></para>
1077 <para>Example: <command>announce version = 2.0</command></para>
1078 </listitem>
1079 </varlistentry>
1083 <varlistentry>
1084 <term><anchor id="AUTOSERVICES">auto services (G)</term>
1085 <listitem><para>This is a synonym for the <link linkend="PRELOAD">
1086 <parameter>preload</parameter></link>.</para>
1087 </listitem>
1088 </varlistentry>
1092 <varlistentry>
1093 <term><anchor id="AVAILABLE">available (S)</term>
1094 <listitem><para>This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If
1095 <parameter>available = no</parameter>, then <emphasis>ALL</emphasis>
1096 attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are
1097 logged.</para>
1099 <para>Default: <command>available = yes</command></para>
1101 </listitem>
1102 </varlistentry>
1106 <varlistentry>
1107 <term><anchor id="BINDINTERFACESONLY">bind interfaces only (G)</term>
1108 <listitem><para>This global parameter allows the Samba admin
1109 to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve smb requests. If
1110 affects file service <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> and
1111 name service <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> in slightly
1112 different ways.</para>
1114 <para>For name service it causes <command>nmbd</command> to bind
1115 to ports 137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the <link
1116 linkend="INTERFACES">interfaces</link> parameter. <command>nmbd
1117 </command> also binds to the "all addresses" interface (0.0.0.0)
1118 on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of reading broadcast messages.
1119 If this option is not set then <command>nmbd</command> will service
1120 name requests on all of these sockets. If <parameter>bind interfaces
1121 only</parameter> is set then <command>nmbd</command> will check the
1122 source address of any packets coming in on the broadcast sockets
1123 and discard any that don't match the broadcast addresses of the
1124 interfaces in the <parameter>interfaces</parameter> parameter list.
1125 As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it allows
1126 <command>nmbd</command> to refuse to serve names to machines that
1127 send packets that arrive through any interfaces not listed in the
1128 <parameter>interfaces</parameter> list. IP Source address spoofing
1129 does defeat this simple check, however so it must not be used
1130 seriously as a security feature for <command>nmbd</command>.</para>
1132 <para>For file service it causes <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink>
1133 to bind only to the interface list given in the <link linkend="INTERFACES">
1134 interfaces</link> parameter. This restricts the networks that
1135 <command>smbd</command> will serve to packets coming in those
1136 interfaces. Note that you should not use this parameter for machines
1137 that are serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network
1138 interfaces as it will not cope with non-permanent interfaces.</para>
1140 <para>If <parameter>bind interfaces only</parameter> is set then
1141 unless the network address <emphasis>127.0.0.1</emphasis> is added
1142 to the <parameter>interfaces</parameter> parameter list <ulink
1143 url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command>smbpasswd(8)</command></ulink>
1144 and <ulink url="swat.8.html"><command>swat(8)</command></ulink> may
1145 not work as expected due to the reasons covered below.</para>
1147 <para>To change a users SMB password, the <command>smbpasswd</command>
1148 by default connects to the <emphasis>localhost - 127.0.0.1</emphasis>
1149 address as an SMB client to issue the password change request. If
1150 <parameter>bind interfaces only</parameter> is set then unless the
1151 network address <emphasis>127.0.0.1</emphasis> is added to the
1152 <parameter>interfaces</parameter> parameter list then <command>
1153 smbpasswd</command> will fail to connect in it's default mode.
1154 <command>smbpasswd</command> can be forced to use the primary IP interface
1155 of the local host by using its <ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html#minusr">
1156 <parameter>-r <replaceable>remote machine</replaceable></parameter>
1157 </ulink> parameter, with <replaceable>remote machine</replaceable> set
1158 to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host.</para>
1160 <para>The <command>swat</command> status page tries to connect with
1161 <command>smbd</command> and <command>nmbd</command> at the address
1162 <emphasis>127.0.0.1</emphasis> to determine if they are running.
1163 Not adding <emphasis>127.0.0.1</emphasis> will cause <command>
1164 smbd</command> and <command>nmbd</command> to always show
1165 "not running" even if they really are. This can prevent <command>
1166 swat</command> from starting/stopping/restarting <command>smbd</command>
1167 and <command>nmbd</command>.</para>
1169 <para>Default: <command>bind interfaces only = no</command></para>
1171 </listitem>
1172 </varlistentry>
1176 <varlistentry>
1177 <term><anchor id="BLOCKINGLOCKS">blocking locks (S)</term>
1178 <listitem><para>This parameter controls the behavior of <ulink
1179 url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> when given a request by a client
1180 to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the
1181 request has a time limit associated with it.</para>
1183 <para>If this parameter is set and the lock range requested
1184 cannot be immediately satisfied, Samba 2.2 will internally
1185 queue the lock request, and periodically attempt to obtain
1186 the lock until the timeout period expires.</para>
1188 <para>If this parameter is set to <constant>False</constant>, then
1189 Samba 2.2 will behave as previous versions of Samba would and
1190 will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range
1191 cannot be obtained.</para>
1193 <para>Default: <command>blocking locks = yes</command></para>
1195 </listitem>
1196 </varlistentry>
1200 <varlistentry>
1201 <term><anchor id="BROWSABLE">browsable (S)</term>
1202 <listitem><para>See the <link linkend="BROWSEABLE"><parameter>
1203 browseable</parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
1204 </varlistentry>
1208 <varlistentry>
1209 <term><anchor id="BROWSELIST">browse list (G)</term>
1210 <listitem><para>This controls whether <ulink url="smbd.8.html">
1211 <command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> will serve a browse list to
1212 a client doing a <command>NetServerEnum</command> call. Normally
1213 set to <constant>true</constant>. You should never need to change
1214 this.</para>
1216 <para>Default: <command>browse list = yes</command></para></listitem>
1217 </varlistentry>
1221 <varlistentry>
1222 <term><anchor id="BROWSEABLE">browseable (S)</term>
1223 <listitem><para>This controls whether this share is seen in
1224 the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list.</para>
1226 <para>Default: <command>browseable = yes</command></para>
1227 </listitem>
1228 </varlistentry>
1232 <varlistentry>
1233 <term><anchor id="CASESENSITIVE">case sensitive (S)</term>
1234 <listitem><para>See the discussion in the section <link
1235 linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT">NAME MANGLING</link>.</para>
1237 <para>Default: <command>case sensitive = no</command></para>
1238 </listitem>
1239 </varlistentry>
1243 <varlistentry>
1244 <term><anchor id="CASESIGNAMES">casesignames (S)</term>
1245 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="CASESENSITIVE">case
1246 sensitive</link>.</para></listitem>
1247 </varlistentry>
1251 <varlistentry>
1252 <term><anchor id="CHANGENOTIFYTIMEOUT">change notify timeout (G)</term>
1253 <listitem><para>This SMB allows a client to tell a server to
1254 "watch" a particular directory for any changes and only reply to
1255 the SMB request when a change has occurred. Such constant scanning of
1256 a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an <ulink url="smbd.8.html">
1257 <command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> daemon only performs such a scan
1258 on each requested directory once every <parameter>change notify
1259 timeout</parameter> seconds.</para>
1261 <para>Default: <command>change notify timeout = 60</command></para>
1262 <para>Example: <command>change notify timeout = 300</command></para>
1264 <para>Would change the scan time to every 5 minutes.</para></listitem>
1265 </varlistentry>
1269 <varlistentry>
1270 <term><anchor id="CHARACTERSET">character set (G)</term>
1271 <listitem><para>This allows a smbd to map incoming filenames
1272 from a DOS Code page (see the <link linkend="CLIENTCODEPAGE">client
1273 code page</link> parameter) to several built in UNIX character sets.
1274 The built in code page translations are:</para>
1276 <itemizedlist>
1277 <listitem><para><constant>ISO8859-1</constant> : Western European
1278 UNIX character set. The parameter <parameter>client code page</parameter>
1279 <emphasis>MUST</emphasis> be set to code page 850 if the
1280 <parameter>character set</parameter> parameter is set to
1281 <constant>ISO8859-1</constant> in order for the conversion to the
1282 UNIX character set to be done correctly.</para></listitem>
1284 <listitem><para><constant>ISO8859-2</constant> : Eastern European
1285 UNIX character set. The parameter <parameter>client code page
1286 </parameter> <emphasis>MUST</emphasis> be set to code page 852 if
1287 the <parameter> character set</parameter> parameter is set
1288 to <constant>ISO8859-2</constant> in order for the conversion
1289 to the UNIX character set to be done correctly. </para></listitem>
1291 <listitem><para><constant>ISO8859-5</constant> : Russian Cyrillic
1292 UNIX character set. The parameter <parameter>client code page
1293 </parameter> <emphasis>MUST</emphasis> be set to code page
1294 866 if the <parameter>character set </parameter> parameter is
1295 set to <constant>ISO8859-5</constant> in order for the conversion
1296 to the UNIX character set to be done correctly. </para></listitem>
1298 <listitem><para><constant>ISO8859-7</constant> : Greek UNIX
1299 character set. The parameter <parameter>client code page
1300 </parameter> <emphasis>MUST</emphasis> be set to code page
1301 737 if the <parameter>character set</parameter> parameter is
1302 set to <constant>ISO8859-7</constant> in order for the conversion
1303 to the UNIX character set to be done correctly.</para></listitem>
1305 <listitem><para><constant>KOI8-R</constant> : Alternate mapping
1306 for Russian Cyrillic UNIX character set. The parameter
1307 <parameter>client code page</parameter> <emphasis>MUST</emphasis>
1308 be set to code page 866 if the <parameter>character set</parameter>
1309 parameter is set to <constant>KOI8-R</constant> in order for the
1310 conversion to the UNIX character set to be done correctly.</para>
1311 </listitem>
1312 </itemizedlist>
1314 <para><emphasis>BUG</emphasis>. These MSDOS code page to UNIX character
1315 set mappings should be dynamic, like the loading of MS DOS code pages,
1316 not static.</para>
1318 <para>Normally this parameter is not set, meaning no filename
1319 translation is done.</para>
1321 <para>Default: <command>character set = &lt;empty string&gt;</command></para>
1322 <para>Example: <command>character set = ISO8859-1</command></para></listitem>
1323 </varlistentry>
1327 <varlistentry>
1328 <term><anchor id="CLIENTCODEPAGE">client code page (G)</term>
1329 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the DOS code page
1330 that the clients accessing Samba are using. To determine what code
1331 page a Windows or DOS client is using, open a DOS command prompt
1332 and type the command <command>chcp</command>. This will output
1333 the code page. The default for USA MS-DOS, Windows 95, and
1334 Windows NT releases is code page 437. The default for western
1335 European releases of the above operating systems is code page 850.</para>
1337 <para>This parameter tells <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink>
1338 which of the <filename>codepage.<replaceable>XXX</replaceable>
1339 </filename> files to dynamically load on startup. These files,
1340 described more fully in the manual page <ulink url="make_smbcodepage.1.html">
1341 <command>make_smbcodepage(1)</command></ulink>, tell <command>
1342 smbd</command> how to map lower to upper case characters to provide
1343 the case insensitivity of filenames that Windows clients expect.</para>
1345 <para>Samba currently ships with the following code page files :</para>
1347 <itemizedlist>
1348 <listitem><para>Code Page 437 - MS-DOS Latin US</para></listitem>
1349 <listitem><para>Code Page 737 - Windows '95 Greek</para></listitem>
1350 <listitem><para>Code Page 850 - MS-DOS Latin 1</para></listitem>
1351 <listitem><para>Code Page 852 - MS-DOS Latin 2</para></listitem>
1352 <listitem><para>Code Page 861 - MS-DOS Icelandic</para></listitem>
1353 <listitem><para>Code Page 866 - MS-DOS Cyrillic</para></listitem>
1354 <listitem><para>Code Page 932 - MS-DOS Japanese SJIS</para></listitem>
1355 <listitem><para>Code Page 936 - MS-DOS Simplified Chinese</para></listitem>
1356 <listitem><para>Code Page 949 - MS-DOS Korean Hangul</para></listitem>
1357 <listitem><para>Code Page 950 - MS-DOS Traditional Chinese</para></listitem>
1358 </itemizedlist>
1360 <para>Thus this parameter may have any of the values 437, 737, 850, 852,
1361 861, 932, 936, 949, or 950. If you don't find the codepage you need,
1362 read the comments in one of the other codepage files and the
1363 <command>make_smbcodepage(1)</command> man page and write one. Please
1364 remember to donate it back to the Samba user community.</para>
1366 <para>This parameter co-operates with the <parameter>valid
1367 chars</parameter> parameter in determining what characters are
1368 valid in filenames and how capitalization is done. If you set both
1369 this parameter and the <parameter>valid chars</parameter> parameter
1370 the <parameter>client code page</parameter> parameter
1371 <emphasis>MUST</emphasis> be set before the <parameter>valid
1372 chars</parameter> parameter in the <filename>smb.conf</filename>
1373 file. The <parameter>valid chars</parameter> string will then
1374 augment the character settings in the <parameter>client code page</parameter>
1375 parameter.</para>
1377 <para>If not set, <parameter>client code page</parameter> defaults
1378 to 850.</para>
1380 <para>See also : <link linkend="VALIDCHARS"><parameter>valid
1381 chars</parameter></link>, <link linkend="CODEPAGEDIRECTORY">
1382 <parameter>code page directory</parameter></link></para>
1384 <para>Default: <command>client code page = 850</command></para>
1385 <para>Example: <command>client code page = 936</command></para>
1386 </listitem>
1387 </varlistentry>
1392 <varlistentry>
1393 <term><anchor id="CODEPAGEDIRECTORY">code page directory (G)</term>
1394 <listitem><para>Define the location of the various client code page
1395 files.</para>
1397 <para>See also <link linkend="CLIENTCODEPAGE"><parameter>client
1398 code page</parameter></link></para>
1400 <para>Default: <command>code page directory = ${prefix}/lib/codepages
1401 </command></para>
1402 <para>Example: <command>code page directory = /usr/share/samba/codepages
1403 </command></para>
1404 </listitem>
1405 </varlistentry>
1411 <varlistentry>
1412 <term><anchor id="CODINGSYSTEM">codingsystem (G)</term>
1413 <listitem><para>This parameter is used to determine how incoming
1414 Shift-JIS Japanese characters are mapped from the incoming <link
1415 linkend="CLIENTCODEPAGE"><parameter>client code page</parameter>
1416 </link> used by the client, into file names in the UNIX filesystem.
1417 Only useful if <parameter>client code page</parameter> is set to
1418 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS). The options are :</para>
1420 <itemizedlist>
1421 <listitem><para><constant>SJIS</constant> - Shift-JIS. Does no
1422 conversion of the incoming filename.</para></listitem>
1424 <listitem><para><constant>JIS8, J8BB, J8BH, J8@B,
1425 J8@J, J8@H </constant> - Convert from incoming Shift-JIS to eight
1426 bit JIS code with different shift-in, shift out codes.</para></listitem>
1428 <listitem><para><constant>JIS7, J7BB, J7BH, J7@B, J7@J,
1429 J7@H </constant> - Convert from incoming Shift-JIS to seven bit
1430 JIS code with different shift-in, shift out codes.</para></listitem>
1432 <listitem><para><constant>JUNET, JUBB, JUBH, JU@B, JU@J, JU@H </constant>
1433 - Convert from incoming Shift-JIS to JUNET code with different shift-in,
1434 shift out codes.</para></listitem>
1436 <listitem><para><constant>EUC</constant> - Convert an incoming
1437 Shift-JIS character to EUC code.</para></listitem>
1439 <listitem><para><constant>HEX</constant> - Convert an incoming
1440 Shift-JIS character to a 3 byte hex representation, i.e.
1441 <constant>:AB</constant>.</para></listitem>
1443 <listitem><para><constant>CAP</constant> - Convert an incoming
1444 Shift-JIS character to the 3 byte hex representation used by
1445 the Columbia AppleTalk Program (CAP), i.e. <constant>:AB</constant>.
1446 This is used for compatibility between Samba and CAP.</para></listitem>
1447 </itemizedlist>
1449 <para>Default: <command>coding system = &lt;empty value&gt;</command>
1450 </para>
1451 </listitem>
1452 </varlistentry>
1456 <varlistentry>
1457 <term><anchor id="COMMENT">comment (S)</term>
1458 <listitem><para>This is a text field that is seen next to a share
1459 when a client does a queries the server, either via the network
1460 neighborhood or via <command>net view</command> to list what shares
1461 are available.</para>
1463 <para>If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the
1464 machine name then see the <link linkend="SERVERSTRING"><parameter>
1465 server string</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
1467 <para>Default: <emphasis>No comment string</emphasis></para>
1468 <para>Example: <command>comment = Fred's Files</command></para></listitem>
1469 </varlistentry>
1473 <varlistentry>
1474 <term><anchor id="CONFIGFILE">config file (G)</term>
1475 <listitem><para>This allows you to override the config file
1476 to use, instead of the default (usually <filename>smb.conf</filename>).
1477 There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set
1478 in the config file!</para>
1480 <para>For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed
1481 when the parameters are loaded then it will reload them from
1482 the new config file.</para>
1484 <para>This option takes the usual substitutions, which can
1485 be very useful.</para>
1487 <para>If the config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded
1488 (allowing you to special case the config files of just a few
1489 clients).</para>
1491 <para>Example: <command>config file = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m
1492 </command></para></listitem>
1493 </varlistentry>
1497 <varlistentry>
1498 <term><anchor id="COPY">copy (S)</term>
1499 <listitem><para>This parameter allows you to "clone" service
1500 entries. The specified service is simply duplicated under the
1501 current service's name. Any parameters specified in the current
1502 section will override those in the section being copied.</para>
1504 <para>This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and
1505 create similar services easily. Note that the service being
1506 copied must occur earlier in the configuration file than the
1507 service doing the copying.</para>
1509 <para>Default: <emphasis>no value</emphasis></para>
1510 <para>Example: <command>copy = otherservice</command></para></listitem>
1511 </varlistentry>
1515 <varlistentry>
1516 <term><anchor id="CREATEMASK">create mask (S)</term>
1517 <listitem><para>A synonym for this parameter is
1518 <link linkend="CREATEMODE"><parameter>create mode</parameter>
1519 </link>.</para>
1521 <para>When a file is created, the necessary permissions are
1522 calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX
1523 permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed
1524 with this parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise
1525 MASK for the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit <emphasis>not</emphasis>
1526 set here will be removed from the modes set on a file when it is
1527 created.</para>
1529 <para>The default value of this parameter removes the
1530 'group' and 'other' write and execute bits from the UNIX modes.</para>
1532 <para>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created
1533 from this parameter with the value of the <link
1534 linkend="FORCECREATEMODE"><parameter>force create mode</parameter></link>
1535 parameter which is set to 000 by default.</para>
1537 <para>This parameter does not affect directory modes. See the
1538 parameter <link linkend="DIRECTORYMODE"><parameter>directory mode
1539 </parameter></link> for details.</para>
1541 <para>See also the <link linkend="FORCECREATEMODE"><parameter>force
1542 create mode</parameter></link> parameter for forcing particular mode
1543 bits to be set on created files. See also the <link linkend="DIRECTORYMODE">
1544 <parameter>directory mode"</parameter></link> parameter for masking
1545 mode bits on created directories. See also the <link linkend="INHERITPERMISSIONS">
1546 <parameter>inherit permissions</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
1548 <para>Default: <command>create mask = 0744</command></para>
1549 <para>Example: <command>create mask = 0775</command></para></listitem>
1550 </varlistentry>
1554 <varlistentry>
1555 <term><anchor id="CREATEMODE">create mode (S)</term>
1556 <listitem><para>This is a synonym for <link linkend="CREATEMASK"><parameter>
1557 create mask</parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
1558 </varlistentry>
1562 <varlistentry>
1563 <term><anchor id="DEADTIME">deadtime (G)</term>
1564 <listitem><para>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer)
1565 represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection
1566 is considered dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes
1567 effect if the number of open files is zero.</para>
1569 <para>This is useful to stop a server's resources being
1570 exhausted by a large number of inactive connections.</para>
1572 <para>Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a
1573 connection is broken so in most cases this parameter should be
1574 transparent to users.</para>
1576 <para>Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes
1577 is recommended for most systems.</para>
1579 <para>A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection
1580 should be performed.</para>
1582 <para>Default: <command>deadtime = 0</command></para>
1583 <para>Example: <command>deadtime = 15</command></para></listitem>
1584 </varlistentry>
1588 <varlistentry>
1589 <term><anchor id="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP">debug hires timestamp (G)</term>
1590 <listitem><para>Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages
1591 are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this
1592 boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp
1593 message header when turned on.</para>
1595 <para>Note that the parameter <link linkend="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"><parameter>
1596 debug timestamp</parameter></link> must be on for this to have an
1597 effect.</para>
1599 <para>Default: <command>debug hires timestamp = no</command></para>
1600 </listitem>
1601 </varlistentry>
1605 <varlistentry>
1606 <term><anchor id="DEBUGPID">debug pid (G)</term>
1607 <listitem><para>When using only one log file for more then one
1608 forked smbd-process there may be hard to follow which process
1609 outputs which message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id
1610 to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on.</para>
1612 <para>Note that the parameter <link linkend="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"><parameter>
1613 debug timestamp</parameter></link> must be on for this to have an
1614 effect.</para>
1616 <para>Default: <command>debug pid = no</command></para></listitem>
1617 </varlistentry>
1620 <varlistentry>
1621 <term><anchor id="DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp (G)</term>
1622 <listitem><para>Samba 2.2 debug log messages are timestamped
1623 by default. If you are running at a high <link linkend="DEBUGLEVEL">
1624 <parameter>debug level</parameter></link> these timestamps
1625 can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping
1626 to be turned off.</para>
1628 <para>Default: <command>debug timestamp = yes</command></para></listitem>
1629 </varlistentry>
1633 <varlistentry>
1634 <term><anchor id="DEBUGUID">debug uid (G)</term>
1635 <listitem><para>Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime
1636 run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the
1637 current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers
1638 in the log file if turned on.</para>
1640 <para>Note that the parameter <link linkend="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"><parameter>
1641 debug timestamp</parameter></link> must be on for this to have an
1642 effect.</para>
1644 <para>Default: <command>debug uid = no</command></para></listitem>
1645 </varlistentry>
1649 <varlistentry>
1650 <term><anchor id="DEBUGLEVEL">debuglevel (G)</term>
1651 <listitem><para>The value of the parameter (an integer) allows
1652 the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the
1653 <filename>smb.conf</filename> file. This is to give greater
1654 flexibility in the configuration of the system.</para>
1656 <para>The default will be the debug level specified on
1657 the command line or level zero if none was specified.</para>
1659 <para>Example: <command>debug level = 3</command></para></listitem>
1660 </varlistentry>
1664 <varlistentry>
1665 <term><anchor id="DEFAULT">default (G)</term>
1666 <listitem><para>A synonym for <link linkend="DEFAULTSERVICE"><parameter>
1667 default service</parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
1668 </varlistentry>
1672 <varlistentry>
1673 <term><anchor id="DEFAULTCASE">default case (S)</term>
1674 <listitem><para>See the section on <link linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT">
1675 NAME MANGLING</link>. Also note the <link linkend="SHORTPRESERVECASE">
1676 <parameter>short preserve case"</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
1678 <para>Default: <command>default case = lower</command></para>
1679 </listitem>
1680 </varlistentry>
1684 <varlistentry>
1685 <term><anchor id="DEFAULTSERVICE">default service (G)</term>
1686 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the name of a service
1687 which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot
1688 be found. Note that the square brackets are <emphasis>NOT</emphasis>
1689 given in the parameter value (see example below).</para>
1691 <para>There is no default value for this parameter. If this
1692 parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent
1693 service results in an error.</para>
1695 <para>Typically the default service would be a <link linkend="GUESTOK">
1696 <parameter>guest ok</parameter></link>, <link linkend="READONLY">
1697 <parameter>read-only</parameter></link> service.</para>
1699 <para>Also note that the apparent service name will be changed
1700 to equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it
1701 allows you to use macros like <parameter>%S</parameter> to make
1702 a wildcard service.</para>
1704 <para>Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service
1705 used in the default service will get mapped to a "/". This allows for
1706 interesting things.</para>
1709 <para>Example:</para>
1711 <para><programlisting>
1712 [global]
1713 default service = pub
1715 [pub]
1716 path = /%S
1717 </programlisting></para>
1718 </listitem>
1719 </varlistentry>
1723 <varlistentry>
1724 <term><anchor id="DELETEREADONLY">delete readonly (S)</term>
1725 <listitem><para>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted.
1726 This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.</para>
1728 <para>This option may be useful for running applications such
1729 as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file
1730 permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.</para>
1732 <para>Default: <command>delete readonly = no</command></para></listitem>
1733 </varlistentry>
1738 <varlistentry>
1739 <term><anchor id="DELETEUSERSCRIPT">delete user script (G)</term>
1740 <listitem><para>This is the full pathname to a script that will
1741 be run <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis> by <ulink url="smbd.8.html">
1742 <command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> under special circumstances
1743 described below.</para>
1745 <para>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are
1746 created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites
1747 that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database
1748 creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the
1749 Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <command>
1750 smbd</command> to delete the required UNIX users <emphasis>ON
1751 DEMAND</emphasis> when a user accesses the Samba server and the
1752 Windows NT user no longer exists.</para>
1754 <para>In order to use this option, <command>smbd</command> must be
1755 set to <parameter>security=domain</parameter> and <parameter>delete
1756 user script</parameter> must be set to a full pathname for a script
1757 that will delete a UNIX user given one argument of <parameter>%u
1758 </parameter>, which expands into the UNIX user name to delete.
1759 <emphasis>NOTE</emphasis> that this is different to the <link
1760 linkend="ADDUSERSCRIPT"><parameter>add user script</parameter></link>
1761 which will work with the <parameter>security=server</parameter> option
1762 as well as <parameter>security=domain</parameter>. The reason for this
1763 is only when Samba is a domain member does it get the information
1764 on an attempted user logon that a user no longer exists. In the
1765 <parameter>security=server</parameter> mode a missing user
1766 is treated the same as an invalid password logon attempt. Deleting
1767 the user in this circumstance would not be a good idea.</para>
1769 <para>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server,
1770 at <emphasis>login</emphasis> (session setup in the SMB protocol)
1771 time, <command>smbd</command> contacts the <link linkend="PASSWORDSERVER">
1772 <parameter>password server</parameter></link> and attempts to authenticate
1773 the given user with the given password. If the authentication fails
1774 with the specific Domain error code meaning that the user no longer
1775 exists then <command>smbd</command> attempts to find a UNIX user in
1776 the UNIX password database that matches the Windows user account. If
1777 this lookup succeeds, and <parameter>delete user script</parameter> is
1778 set then <command>smbd</command> will all the specified script
1779 <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis>, expanding any <parameter>%u</parameter>
1780 argument to be the user name to delete.</para>
1782 <para>This script should delete the given UNIX username. In this way,
1783 UNIX users are dynamically deleted to match existing Windows NT
1784 accounts.</para>
1786 <para>See also <link linkend="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN">security=domain</link>,
1787 <link linkend="PASSWORDSERVER"><parameter>password server</parameter>
1788 </link>, <link linkend="ADDUSERSCRIPT"><parameter>add user script</parameter>
1789 </link>.</para>
1791 <para>Default: <command>delete user script = &lt;empty string&gt;
1792 </command></para>
1793 <para>Example: <command>delete user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/del_user
1794 %u</command></para></listitem>
1795 </varlistentry>
1800 <varlistentry>
1801 <term><anchor id="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND">deleteprinter command (G)</term>
1802 <listitem><para>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer
1803 support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now
1804 possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the
1805 DeletePrinter() RPC call.</para>
1807 <para>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be
1808 physically deleted from underlying printing system. The <parameter>
1809 deleteprinter command</parameter> defines a script to be run which
1810 will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer
1811 from the print system and from <filename>smb.conf</filename>.
1812 </para>
1814 <para>The <parameter>deleteprinter command</parameter> is
1815 automatically called with only one parameter: <parameter>
1816 "printer name"</parameter>.</para>
1819 <para>Once the <parameter>deleteprinter command</parameter> has
1820 been executed, <command>smbd</command> will reparse the <filename>
1821 smb.conf</filename> to associated printer no longer exists.
1822 If the sharename is still valid, then <command>smbd
1823 </command> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</para>
1825 <para>See also <link linkend="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"><parameter>
1826 addprinter command</parameter></link>, <link
1827 linkend="printing"><parameter>printing</parameter></link>,
1828 <link linkend="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"><parameter>show add
1829 printer wizard</parameter></link></para>
1831 <para>Default: <emphasis>none</emphasis></para>
1832 <para>Example: <command>deleteprinter command = /usr/bin/removeprinter
1833 </command></para>
1834 </listitem>
1835 </varlistentry>
1841 <varlistentry>
1842 <term><anchor id="DELETEVETOFILES">delete veto files (S)</term>
1843 <listitem><para>This option is used when Samba is attempting to
1844 delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories
1845 (see the <link linkend="VETOFILES"><parameter>veto files</parameter></link>
1846 option). If this option is set to False (the default) then if a vetoed
1847 directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the
1848 directory delete will fail. This is usually what you want.</para>
1850 <para>If this option is set to <constant>True</constant>, then Samba
1851 will attempt to recursively delete any files and directories within
1852 the vetoed directory. This can be useful for integration with file
1853 serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within
1854 directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing
1855 (e.g. <filename>.AppleDouble</filename>)</para>
1857 <para>Setting <command>delete veto files = yes</command> allows these
1858 directories to be transparently deleted when the parent directory
1859 is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so).</para>
1861 <para>See also the <link linkend="VETOFILES"><parameter>veto
1862 files</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
1864 <para>Default: <command>delete veto files = no</command></para></listitem>
1865 </varlistentry>
1870 <varlistentry>
1871 <term><anchor id="DENYHOSTS">deny hosts (S)</term>
1872 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="HOSTSDENY"><parameter>hosts
1873 deny</parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
1874 </varlistentry>
1879 <varlistentry>
1880 <term><anchor id="DFREECOMMAND">dfree command (G)</term>
1881 <listitem><para>The <parameter>dfree command</parameter> setting should
1882 only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal
1883 disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix,
1884 but may occur with other operating systems. The symptom that was
1885 seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the end of each
1886 directory listing.</para>
1888 <para>This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to
1889 calculate the total disk space and amount available with an external
1890 routine. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill
1891 this function.</para>
1893 <para>The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating
1894 a directory in the filesystem being queried. This will typically consist
1895 of the string <filename>./</filename>. The script should return two
1896 integers in ASCII. The first should be the total disk space in blocks,
1897 and the second should be the number of available blocks. An optional
1898 third return value can give the block size in bytes. The default
1899 blocksize is 1024 bytes.</para>
1901 <para>Note: Your script should <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> be setuid or
1902 setgid and should be owned by (and writeable only by) root!</para>
1904 <para>Default: <emphasis>By default internal routines for
1905 determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used.
1906 </emphasis></para>
1908 <para>Example: <command>dfree command = /usr/local/samba/bin/dfree
1909 </command></para>
1911 <para>Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:</para>
1913 <para><programlisting>
1914 #!/bin/sh
1915 df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}'
1916 </programlisting></para>
1918 <para>or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):</para>
1920 <para><programlisting>
1921 #!/bin/sh
1922 /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}'
1923 </programlisting></para>
1925 <para>Note that you may have to replace the command names
1926 with full path names on some systems.</para>
1927 </listitem>
1928 </varlistentry>
1933 <varlistentry>
1934 <term><anchor id="DIRECTORY">directory (S)</term>
1935 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="PATH"><parameter>path
1936 </parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
1937 </varlistentry>
1941 <varlistentry>
1942 <term><anchor id="DIRECTORYMASK">directory mask (S)</term>
1943 <listitem><para>This parameter is the octal modes which are
1944 used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX
1945 directories.</para>
1947 <para>When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are
1948 calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions,
1949 and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this
1950 parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for
1951 the UNIX modes of a directory. Any bit <emphasis>not</emphasis> set
1952 here will be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is
1953 created.</para>
1955 <para>The default value of this parameter removes the 'group'
1956 and 'other' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the
1957 user who owns the directory to modify it.</para>
1959 <para>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode
1960 created from this parameter with the value of the <link
1961 linkend="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"><parameter>force directory mode
1962 </parameter></link> parameter. This parameter is set to 000 by
1963 default (i.e. no extra mode bits are added).</para>
1965 <para>See the <link linkend="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"><parameter>force
1966 directory mode</parameter></link> parameter to cause particular mode
1967 bits to always be set on created directories.</para>
1969 <para>See also the <link linkend="CREATEMODE"><parameter>create mode
1970 </parameter></link> parameter for masking mode bits on created files,
1971 and the <link linkend="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"><parameter>directory
1972 security mask</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
1974 <para>Also refer to the <link linkend="INHERITPERMISSIONS"><parameter>
1975 inherit permissions</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
1977 <para>Default: <command>directory mask = 0755</command></para>
1978 <para>Example: <command>directory mask = 0775</command></para>
1979 </listitem>
1980 </varlistentry>
1984 <varlistentry>
1985 <term><anchor id="DIRECTORYMODE">directory mode (S)</term>
1986 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="DIRECTORYMASK"><parameter>
1987 directory mask</parameter></link></para></listitem>
1988 </varlistentry>
1992 <varlistentry>
1993 <term><anchor id="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK">directory security mask (S)</term>
1994 <listitem><para>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits
1995 can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX
1996 permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog
1997 box.</para>
1999 <para>This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to
2000 the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in
2001 this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this
2002 mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed
2003 to change.</para>
2005 <para>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same
2006 value as the <link linkend="DIRECTORYMASK"><parameter>directory
2007 mask</parameter></link> parameter. To allow a user to
2008 modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory, set
2009 this parameter to 0777.</para>
2011 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that users who can access the
2012 Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction,
2013 so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.
2014 Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to set
2015 it to 0777.</para>
2017 <para>See also the <link linkend="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"><parameter>
2018 force directory security mode</parameter></link>, <link
2019 linkend="SECURITYMASK"><parameter>security mask</parameter></link>,
2020 <link linkend="FORCESECURITYMODE"><parameter>force security mode
2021 </parameter></link> parameters.</para>
2023 <para>Default: <command>directory security mask = &lt;same as
2024 directory mask&gt;</command></para>
2025 <para>Example: <command>directory security mask = 0777</command></para>
2026 </listitem>
2027 </varlistentry>
2031 <varlistentry>
2032 <term><anchor id="DNSPROXY">dns proxy (G)</term>
2033 <listitem><para>Specifies that <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink>
2034 when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not
2035 been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS
2036 name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of
2037 the name-querying client.</para>
2039 <para>Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15
2040 characters, so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be
2041 15 characters, maximum.</para>
2043 <para><command>nmbd</command> spawns a second copy of itself to do the
2044 DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking
2045 action.</para>
2047 <para>See also the parameter <link linkend="WINSSUPPORT"><parameter>
2048 wins support</parameter></link>.</para>
2050 <para>Default: <command>dns proxy = yes</command></para></listitem>
2051 </varlistentry>
2055 <varlistentry>
2056 <term><anchor id="DOMAINADMINGROUP">domain admin group (G)</term>
2057 <listitem><para>This is an <emphasis>EXPERIMENTAL</emphasis> parameter
2058 that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may
2059 be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds
2060 that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality
2061 please subscribe to the mailing list <ulink
2062 url="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org">samba-ntdom</ulink> available by
2063 visiting the web page at <ulink url="http://lists.samba.org/">
2064 http://lists.samba.org/</ulink>.</para></listitem>
2065 </varlistentry>
2068 <varlistentry>
2069 <term><anchor id="DOMAINADMINUSERS">domain admin users (G)</term>
2070 <listitem><para>This is an <emphasis>EXPERIMENTAL</emphasis> parameter
2071 that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may
2072 be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds
2073 that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality
2074 please subscribe to the mailing list <ulink
2075 url="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org">samba-ntdom</ulink> available by
2076 visiting the web page at <ulink url="http://lists.samba.org/">
2077 http://lists.samba.org/</ulink>.</para></listitem>
2078 </varlistentry>
2081 <varlistentry>
2082 <term><anchor id="DOMAINGROUPS">domain groups (G)</term>
2083 <listitem><para>This is an <emphasis>EXPERIMENTAL</emphasis> parameter
2084 that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may
2085 be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds
2086 that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality
2087 please subscribe to the mailing list <ulink
2088 url="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org">samba-ntdom</ulink> available by
2089 visiting the web page at <ulink url="http://lists.samba.org/">
2090 http://lists.samba.org/</ulink>.</para></listitem>
2091 </varlistentry>
2095 <varlistentry>
2096 <term><anchor id="DOMAINGUESTGROUP">domain guest group (G)</term>
2097 <listitem><para>This is an <emphasis>EXPERIMENTAL</emphasis> parameter
2098 that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may
2099 be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds
2100 that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality
2101 please subscribe to the mailing list <ulink
2102 url="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org">samba-ntdom</ulink> available by
2103 visiting the web page at <ulink url="http://lists.samba.org/">
2104 http://lists.samba.org/</ulink>.</para></listitem>
2105 </varlistentry>
2108 <varlistentry>
2109 <term><anchor id="DOMAINGUESTUSERS">domain guest users (G)</term>
2110 <listitem><para>This is an <emphasis>EXPERIMENTAL</emphasis> parameter
2111 that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may
2112 be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds
2113 that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality
2114 please subscribe to the mailing list <ulink
2115 url="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org">samba-ntdom</ulink> available by
2116 visiting the web page at <ulink url="http://lists.samba.org/">
2117 http://lists.samba.org/</ulink>.</para></listitem>
2118 </varlistentry>
2121 <varlistentry>
2122 <term><anchor id="DOMAINLOGONS">domain logons (G)</term>
2123 <listitem><para>If set to true, the Samba server will serve
2124 Windows 95/98 Domain logons for the <link linkend="WORKGROUP">
2125 <parameter>workgroup</parameter></link> it is in. Samba 2.2 also
2126 has limited capability to act as a domain controller for Windows
2127 NT 4 Domains. For more details on setting up this feature see
2128 the file DOMAINS.txt in the Samba documentation directory <filename>docs/
2129 </filename> shipped with the source code.</para>
2131 <para>Default: <command>domain logons = no</command></para></listitem>
2132 </varlistentry>
2136 <varlistentry>
2137 <term><anchor id="DOMAINMASTER">domain master (G)</term>
2138 <listitem><para>Tell <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command>
2139 nmbd(8)</command></ulink> to enable WAN-wide browse list
2140 collation. Setting this option causes <command>nmbd</command> to
2141 claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies
2142 it as a domain master browser for its given <link linkend="WORKGROUP">
2143 <parameter>workgroup</parameter></link>. Local master browsers
2144 in the same <parameter>workgroup</parameter> on broadcast-isolated
2145 subnets will give this <command>nmbd</command> their local browse lists,
2146 and then ask <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>
2147 for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area
2148 network. Browser clients will then contact their local master browser,
2149 and will receive the domain-wide browse list, instead of just the list
2150 for their broadcast-isolated subnet.</para>
2152 <para>Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be
2153 able to claim this <parameter>workgroup</parameter> specific special
2154 NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for
2155 that <parameter>workgroup</parameter> by default (i.e. there is no
2156 way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this). This
2157 means that if this parameter is set and <command>nmbd</command> claims
2158 the special name for a <parameter>workgroup</parameter> before a Windows
2159 NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave
2160 strangely and may fail.</para>
2162 <para>If <link linkend="DOMAINLOGONS"><command>domain logons = yes</command>
2163 </link>, then the default behavior is to enable the <parameter>domain
2164 master</parameter> parameter. If <parameter>domain logons</parameter> is
2165 not enabled (the default setting), then neither will <parameter>domain
2166 master</parameter> be enabled by default.</para>
2168 <para>Default: <command>domain master = auto</command></para></listitem>
2169 </varlistentry>
2174 <varlistentry>
2175 <term><anchor id="DONTDESCEND">dont descend (S)</term>
2176 <listitem><para>There are certain directories on some systems
2177 (e.g., the <filename>/proc</filename> tree under Linux) that are either not
2178 of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive). This
2179 parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list of directories
2180 that the server should always show as empty.</para>
2182 <para>Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format
2183 of the "dont descend" entries. For example you may need <filename>
2184 ./proc</filename> instead of just <filename>/proc</filename>.
2185 Experimentation is the best policy :-) </para>
2187 <para>Default: <emphasis>none (i.e., all directories are OK
2188 to descend)</emphasis></para>
2189 <para>Example: <command>dont descend = /proc,/dev</command></para>
2190 </listitem>
2191 </varlistentry>
2195 <varlistentry>
2196 <term><anchor id="DOSFILEMODE">dos filemode (S)</term>
2197 <listitem><para> The default behavior in Samba is to provide
2198 UNIX-like behavor where only the owner of a file/directory is
2199 able to change the permissions on it. However, this behavior
2200 is often confusing to DOS/Windows users. Enabling this parameter
2201 allows a user who has write access to the file (by whatever
2202 means) to modify the permissions on it. Note that a user
2203 belonging to the group owning the file will not be allowed to
2204 change permissions if the group is only granted read access.
2205 Ownership of the file/directory is not changed, only the permissions
2206 are modified.</para>
2208 <para>Default: <command>dos filemode = no</command></para>
2209 </listitem>
2210 </varlistentry>
2214 <varlistentry>
2215 <term><anchor id="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION">dos filetime resolution (S)</term>
2216 <listitem><para>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest
2217 granularity on time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter
2218 for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the
2219 nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second
2220 resolution is made to <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command>
2221 </ulink>.</para>
2223 <para>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual
2224 C++ when used against Samba shares. If oplocks are enabled on a
2225 share, Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a
2226 file has changed since it was last read. One of these calls uses a
2227 one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity. As
2228 the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a
2229 timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not
2230 match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has changed. Setting
2231 this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is
2232 happy.</para>
2234 <para>Default: <command>dos filetime resolution = no</command></para>
2235 </listitem>
2236 </varlistentry>
2240 <varlistentry>
2241 <term><anchor id="DOSFILETIMES">dos filetimes (S)</term>
2242 <listitem><para>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a
2243 file they can change the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics,
2244 only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp. By
2245 default, Samba runs with POSIX semantics and refuses to change the
2246 timestamp on a file if the user <command>smbd</command> is acting
2247 on behalf of is not the file owner. Setting this option to <constant>
2248 True</constant> allows DOS semantics and smbd will change the file
2249 timestamp as DOS requires.</para>
2251 <para>Default: <command>dos filetimes = no</command></para></listitem>
2252 </varlistentry>
2256 <varlistentry>
2257 <term><anchor id="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS">encrypt passwords (G)</term>
2258 <listitem><para>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords
2259 will be negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and
2260 above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords
2261 unless a registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in
2262 Samba see the file ENCRYPTION.txt in the Samba documentation
2263 directory <filename>docs/</filename> shipped with the source code.</para>
2265 <para>In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly
2266 <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> must either
2267 have access to a local <ulink url="smbpasswd.5.html"><filename>smbpasswd(5)
2268 </filename></ulink> file (see the <ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command>
2269 smbpasswd(8)</command></ulink> program for information on how to set up
2270 and maintain this file), or set the <link
2271 linkend="SECURITY">security=[serve|domain]</link> parameter which
2272 causes <command>smbd</command> to authenticate against another
2273 server.</para>
2275 <para>Default: <command>encrypt passwords = no</command></para></listitem>
2276 </varlistentry>
2279 <varlistentry>
2280 <term><anchor id="ENHANCEDBROWSING">enhanced browsing (G)</term>
2281 <listitem><para>This option enables a couple of enhancements to
2282 cross-subnet browse propogation that have been added in Samba
2283 but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations.
2284 <emphasis>These enhancements are currently only available in
2285 the HEAD Samba CVS tree (not Samba 2.2.x).</emphasis></para>
2287 <para>The first enhancement to browse propogation consists of a regular
2288 wildcard query to a Samba WINS server for all Domain Master Browsers,
2289 followed by a browse synchronisation with each of the returned
2290 DMBs. The second enhancement consists of a regular randomised browse
2291 synchronisation with all currently known DMBs.</para>
2293 <para>You may wish to disable this option if you have a problem with empty
2294 workgroups not disappearing from browse lists. Due to the restrictions
2295 of the browse protocols these enhancements can cause a empty workgroup
2296 to stay around forever which can be annoying.</para>
2298 <para>In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes
2299 cross-subnet browse propogation much more reliable.</para>
2301 <para>Default: <command>enhanced browsing = yes</command></para>
2302 </listitem>
2303 </varlistentry>
2306 <varlistentry>
2307 <term><anchor id="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND">enumports command (G)</term>
2308 <listitem><para>The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign
2309 to UNIX hosts. Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port
2310 is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of
2311 a local port (i.e. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port
2312 (i.e. LPD Port Monitor, etc...). By default, Samba has only one
2313 port defined--<constant>"Samba Printer Port"</constant>. Under
2314 Windows NT/2000, all printers must have a valid port name.
2315 If you wish to have a list of ports displayed (<command>smbd
2316 </command> does not use a port name for anything) other than
2317 the default <constant>"Samba Printer Port"</constant>, you
2318 can define <parameter>enumports command</parameter> to point to
2319 a program which should generate a list of ports, one per line,
2320 to standard output. This listing will then be used in response
2321 to the level 1 and 2 EnumPorts() RPC.</para>
2323 <para>Default: <emphasis>no enumports command</emphasis></para>
2324 <para>Example: <command>enumports command = /usr/bin/listports
2325 </command></para>
2326 </listitem>
2327 </varlistentry>
2329 <varlistentry>
2330 <term><anchor id="EXEC">exec (S)</term>
2331 <listitem><para>This is a synonym for <link linkend="PREEXEC">
2332 <parameter>preexec</parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
2333 </varlistentry>
2337 <varlistentry>
2338 <term><anchor id="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES">fake directory create times (S)</term>
2339 <listitem><para>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create
2340 time for all files and directories. This is not the same as the
2341 ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default
2342 reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep. Setting
2343 this parameter for a share causes Samba to always report midnight
2344 1-1-1980 as the create time for directories.</para>
2346 <para>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for
2347 Visual C++ when used against Samba shares. Visual C++ generated
2348 makefiles have the object directory as a dependency for each object
2349 file, and a make rule to create the directory. Also, when NMAKE
2350 compares timestamps it uses the creation time when examining a
2351 directory. Thus the object directory will be created if it does not
2352 exist, but once it does exist it will always have an earlier
2353 timestamp than the object files it contains.</para>
2355 <para>However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time
2356 reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or
2357 or deleted in the directory. NMAKE finds all object files in
2358 the object directory. The timestamp of the last one built is then
2359 compared to the timestamp of the object dircetory. If the
2360 directory's timestamp if newer, then all object files
2361 will be rebuilt. Enabling this option
2362 ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build
2363 will proceed as expected.</para>
2365 <para>Default: <command>fake directory create times = no</command></para>
2366 </listitem>
2367 </varlistentry>
2371 <varlistentry>
2372 <term><anchor id="FAKEOPLOCKS">fake oplocks (S)</term>
2373 <listitem><para>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission
2374 from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants
2375 an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume
2376 that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively
2377 cache file data. With some oplock types the client may even cache
2378 file open/close operations. This can give enormous performance benefits.
2379 </para>
2381 <para>When you set <command>fake oplocks = yes</command>, <ulink
2382 url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> will
2383 always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using
2384 the file.</para>
2386 <para>It is generally much better to use the real <link
2387 linkend="OPLOCKS"><parameter>oplocks</parameter></link> support rather
2388 than this parameter.</para>
2390 <para>If you enable this option on all read-only shares or
2391 shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a
2392 time such as physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see
2393 a big performance improvement on many operations. If you enable
2394 this option on shares where multiple clients may be accessing the
2395 files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption. Use
2396 this option carefully!</para>
2398 <para>Default: <command>fake oplocks = no</command></para></listitem>
2399 </varlistentry>
2403 <varlistentry>
2404 <term><anchor id="FOLLOWSYMLINKS">follow symlinks (S)</term>
2405 <listitem><para>This parameter allows the Samba administrator
2406 to stop <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>
2407 from following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this
2408 parameter to <constant>no</constant> prevents any file or directory
2409 that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an
2410 error). This option is very useful to stop users from adding a
2411 symbolic link to <filename>/etc/passwd</filename> in their home
2412 directory for instance. However it will slow filename lookups
2413 down slightly.</para>
2415 <para>This option is enabled (i.e. <command>smbd</command> will
2416 follow symbolic links) by default.</para>
2418 <para>Default: <command>follow symlinks = yes</command></para></listitem>
2419 </varlistentry>
2423 <varlistentry>
2424 <term><anchor id="FORCECREATEMODE">force create mode (S)</term>
2425 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit
2426 permissions that will <emphasis>always</emphasis> be set on a
2427 file created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto
2428 the mode bits of a file that is being created or having its
2429 permissions changed. The default for this parameter is (in octal)
2430 000. The modes in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto the file
2431 mode after the mask set in the <parameter>create mask</parameter>
2432 parameter is applied.</para>
2434 <para>See also the parameter <link linkend="CREATEMASK"><parameter>create
2435 mask</parameter></link> for details on masking mode bits on files.</para>
2437 <para>See also the <link linkend="INHERITPERMISSIONS"><parameter>inherit
2438 permissions</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
2440 <para>Default: <command>force create mode = 000</command></para>
2441 <para>Example: <command>force create mode = 0755</command></para>
2443 <para>would force all created files to have read and execute
2444 permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the
2445 read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.</para>
2446 </listitem>
2447 </varlistentry>
2451 <varlistentry>
2452 <term><anchor id="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE">force directory mode (S)</term>
2453 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit
2454 permissions that will <emphasis>always</emphasis> be set on a directory
2455 created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the
2456 mode bits of a directory that is being created. The default for this
2457 parameter is (in octal) 0000 which will not add any extra permission
2458 bits to a created directory. This operation is done after the mode
2459 mask in the parameter <parameter>directory mask</parameter> is
2460 applied.</para>
2462 <para>See also the parameter <link linkend="DIRECTORYMASK"><parameter>
2463 directory mask</parameter></link> for details on masking mode bits
2464 on created directories.</para>
2466 <para>See also the <link linkend="INHERITPERMISSIONS"><parameter>
2467 inherit permissions</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
2469 <para>Default: <command>force directory mode = 000</command></para>
2470 <para>Example: <command>force directory mode = 0755</command></para>
2472 <para>would force all created directories to have read and execute
2473 permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the
2474 read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.</para>
2475 </listitem>
2476 </varlistentry>
2480 <varlistentry>
2481 <term><anchor id="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE">force directory
2482 security mode (S)</term>
2483 <listitem><para>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits
2484 can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX
2485 permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.</para>
2487 <para>This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the
2488 changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that
2489 the user may have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this
2490 mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security
2491 on a directory, the user has always set to be 'on'.</para>
2493 <para>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same
2494 value as the <link linkend="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"><parameter>force
2495 directory mode</parameter></link> parameter. To allow
2496 a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a
2497 directory without restrictions, set this parameter to 000.</para>
2499 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that users who can access the
2500 Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction,
2501 so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.
2502 Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to set
2503 it to 0000.</para>
2505 <para>See also the <link linkend="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"><parameter>
2506 directory security mask</parameter></link>, <link linkend="SECURITYMASK">
2507 <parameter>security mask</parameter></link>,
2508 <link linkend="FORCESECURITYMODE"><parameter>force security mode
2509 </parameter></link> parameters.</para>
2511 <para>Default: <command>force directory security mode = &lt;same as
2512 force directory mode&gt;</command></para>
2513 <para>Example: <command>force directory security mode = 0</command></para>
2514 </listitem>
2515 </varlistentry>
2520 <varlistentry>
2521 <term><anchor id="FORCEGROUP">force group (S)</term>
2522 <listitem><para>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be
2523 assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting
2524 to this service. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring
2525 that all access to files on service will use the named group for
2526 their permissions checking. Thus, by assigning permissions for this
2527 group to the files and directories within this service the Samba
2528 administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these files.</para>
2530 <para>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter has extended
2531 functionality in the following way. If the group name listed here
2532 has a '+' character prepended to it then the current user accessing
2533 the share only has the primary group default assigned to this group
2534 if they are already assigned as a member of that group. This allows
2535 an administrator to decide that only users who are already in a
2536 particular group will create files with group ownership set to that
2537 group. This gives a finer granularity of ownership assignment. For
2538 example, the setting <filename>force group = +sys</filename> means
2539 that only users who are already in group sys will have their default
2540 primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share. All
2541 other users will retain their ordinary primary group.</para>
2543 <para>If the <link linkend="FORCEUSER"><parameter>force user
2544 </parameter></link> parameter is also set the group specified in
2545 <parameter>force group</parameter> will override the primary group
2546 set in <parameter>force user</parameter>.</para>
2548 <para>See also <link linkend="FORCEUSER"><parameter>force
2549 user</parameter></link>.</para>
2551 <para>Default: <emphasis>no forced group</emphasis></para>
2552 <para>Example: <command>force group = agroup</command></para>
2553 </listitem>
2554 </varlistentry>
2558 <varlistentry>
2559 <term><anchor id="FORCESECURITYMODE">force security mode (S)</term>
2560 <listitem><para>This parameter controls what UNIX permission
2561 bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating
2562 the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog
2563 box.</para>
2565 <para>This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the
2566 changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that
2567 the user may have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this
2568 mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security
2569 on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</para>
2571 <para>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same
2572 value as the <link linkend="FORCECREATEMODE"><parameter>force
2573 create mode</parameter></link> parameter. To allow a user to
2574 modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, with no
2575 restrictions set this parameter to 000.</para>
2577 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that users who can access
2578 the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction,
2579 so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.
2580 Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to set
2581 it to 0000.</para>
2583 <para>See also the <link linkend="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"><parameter>
2584 force directory security mode</parameter></link>,
2585 <link linkend="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"><parameter>directory security
2586 mask</parameter></link>, <link linkend="SECURITYMASK"><parameter>
2587 security mask</parameter></link> parameters.</para>
2589 <para>Default: <command>force security mode = &lt;same as force
2590 create mode&gt;</command></para>
2591 <para>Example: <command>force security mode = 0</command></para>
2592 </listitem>
2593 </varlistentry>
2597 <varlistentry>
2598 <term><anchor id="FORCEUSER">force user (S)</term>
2599 <listitem><para>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be
2600 assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service.
2601 This is useful for sharing files. You should also use it carefully
2602 as using it incorrectly can cause security problems.</para>
2604 <para>This user name only gets used once a connection is established.
2605 Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a
2606 valid password. Once connected, all file operations will be performed
2607 as the "forced user", no matter what username the client connected
2608 as. This can be very useful.</para>
2610 <para>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter also causes the
2611 primary group of the forced user to be used as the primary group
2612 for all file activity. Prior to 2.0.5 the primary group was left
2613 as the primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug).</para>
2615 <para>See also <link linkend="FORCEGROUP"><parameter>force group
2616 </parameter></link></para>
2618 <para>Default: <emphasis>no forced user</emphasis></para>
2619 <para>Example: <command>force user = auser</command></para>
2620 </listitem>
2621 </varlistentry>
2625 <varlistentry>
2626 <term><anchor id="FSTYPE">fstype (S)</term>
2627 <listitem><para>This parameter allows the administrator to
2628 configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share
2629 is using that is reported by <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)
2630 </command></ulink> when a client queries the filesystem type
2631 for a share. The default type is <constant>NTFS</constant> for
2632 compatibility with Windows NT but this can be changed to other
2633 strings such as <constant>Samba</constant> or <constant>FAT
2634 </constant> if required.</para>
2636 <para>Default: <command>fstype = NTFS</command></para>
2637 <para>Example: <command>fstype = Samba</command></para></listitem>
2638 </varlistentry>
2642 <varlistentry>
2643 <term><anchor id="GETWDCACHE">getwd cache (G)</term>
2644 <listitem><para>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a
2645 caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd()
2646 calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially
2647 when the <link linkend="WIDELINKS"><parameter>wide links</parameter>
2648 </link>parameter is set to <constant>False</constant>.</para>
2650 <para>Default: <command>getwd cache = yes</command></para>
2651 </listitem>
2652 </varlistentry>
2656 <varlistentry>
2657 <term><anchor id="GROUP">group (S)</term>
2658 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="FORCEGROUP"><parameter>force
2659 group</parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
2660 </varlistentry>
2664 <varlistentry>
2665 <term><anchor id="GUESTACCOUNT">guest account (S)</term>
2666 <listitem><para>This is a username which will be used for access
2667 to services which are specified as <link linkend="GUESTOK"><parameter>
2668 guest ok</parameter></link> (see below). Whatever privileges this
2669 user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service.
2670 Typically this user will exist in the password file, but will not
2671 have a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice
2672 for this parameter. If a username is specified in a given service,
2673 the specified username overrides this one.</para>
2675 <para>One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not
2676 be able to print. Use another account in this case. You should test
2677 this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the
2678 <command>su -</command> command) and trying to print using the
2679 system print command such as <command>lpr(1)</command> or <command>
2680 lp(1)</command>.</para>
2682 <para>Default: <emphasis>specified at compile time, usually
2683 "nobody"</emphasis></para>
2685 <para>Example: <command>guest account = ftp</command></para></listitem>
2686 </varlistentry>
2690 <varlistentry>
2691 <term><anchor id="GUESTOK">guest ok (S)</term>
2692 <listitem><para>If this parameter is <constant>yes</constant> for
2693 a service, then no password is required to connect to the service.
2694 Privileges will be those of the <link linkend="GUESTACCOUNT"><parameter>
2695 guest account</parameter></link>.</para>
2697 <para>See the section below on <link linkend="SECURITY"><parameter>
2698 security</parameter></link> for more information about this option.
2699 </para>
2701 <para>Default: <command>guest ok = no</command></para></listitem>
2702 </varlistentry>
2706 <varlistentry>
2707 <term><anchor id="GUESTONLY">guest only (S)</term>
2708 <listitem><para>If this parameter is <constant>yes</constant> for
2709 a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted.
2710 This parameter will have no effect if <link linkend="GUESTOK">
2711 <parameter>guest ok</parameter></link> is not set for the service.</para>
2713 <para>See the section below on <link linkend="SECURITY"><parameter>
2714 security</parameter></link> for more information about this option.
2715 </para>
2717 <para>Default: <command>guest only = no</command></para></listitem>
2718 </varlistentry>
2722 <varlistentry>
2723 <term><anchor id="HIDEDOTFILES">hide dot files (S)</term>
2724 <listitem><para>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether
2725 files starting with a dot appear as hidden files.</para>
2727 <para>Default: <command>hide dot files = yes</command></para></listitem>
2728 </varlistentry>
2732 <varlistentry>
2733 <term><anchor id="HIDEFILES">hide files(S)</term>
2734 <listitem><para>This is a list of files or directories that are not
2735 visible but are accessible. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied
2736 to any files or directories that match.</para>
2738 <para>Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/',
2739 which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*'
2740 and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories
2741 as in DOS wildcards.</para>
2743 <para>Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must
2744 not include the Unix directory separator '/'.</para>
2746 <para>Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable
2747 in hiding files.</para>
2749 <para>Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba,
2750 as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match
2751 as they are scanned.</para>
2753 <para>See also <link linkend="HIDEDOTFILES"><parameter>hide
2754 dot files</parameter></link>, <link linkend="VETOFILES"><parameter>
2755 veto files</parameter></link> and <link linkend="CASESENSITIVE">
2756 <parameter>case sensitive</parameter></link>.</para>
2758 <para>Default: <emphasis>no file are hidden</emphasis></para>
2759 <para>Example: <command>hide files =
2760 /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/</command></para>
2762 <para>The above example is based on files that the Macintosh
2763 SMB client (DAVE) available from <ulink url="http://www.thursby.com">
2764 Thursby</ulink> creates for internal use, and also still hides
2765 all files beginning with a dot.</para></listitem>
2766 </varlistentry>
2770 <varlistentry>
2771 <term><anchor id="HIDELOCALUSERS">hide local users(G)</term>
2772 <listitem><para>This parameter toggles the hiding of local UNIX
2773 users (root, wheel, floppy, etc) from remote clients.</para>
2775 <para>Default: <command>hide local users = no</command></para></listitem>
2776 </varlistentry>
2780 <varlistentry>
2781 <term><anchor id="HOMEDIRMAP">homedir map (G)</term>
2782 <listitem><para>If<link linkend="NISHOMEDIR"><parameter>nis homedir
2783 </parameter></link> is <constant>True</constant>, and <ulink
2784 url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> is also acting
2785 as a Win95/98 <parameter>logon server</parameter> then this parameter
2786 specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's
2787 home directory should be extracted. At present, only the Sun
2788 auto.home map format is understood. The form of the map is:</para>
2790 <para><command>username server:/some/file/system</command></para>
2792 <para>and the program will extract the servername from before
2793 the first ':'. There should probably be a better parsing system
2794 that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another
2795 automounter) maps.</para>
2797 <para><emphasis>NOTE :</emphasis>A working NIS client is required on
2798 the system for this option to work.</para>
2800 <para>See also <link linkend="NISHOMEDIR"><parameter>nis homedir</parameter>
2801 </link>, <link linkend="DOMAINLOGONS"><parameter>domain logons</parameter>
2802 </link>.</para>
2804 <para>Default: <command>homedir map = &lt;empty string&gt;</command></para>
2805 <para>Example: <command>homedir map = amd.homedir</command></para>
2806 </listitem>
2807 </varlistentry>
2813 <varlistentry>
2814 <term><anchor id="HOSTMSDFS">host msdfs (G)</term>
2815 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter is only available
2816 if Samba has been configured and compiled with the <command>
2817 --with-msdfs</command> option. If set to <constant>yes</constant>,
2818 Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients
2819 to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server.</para>
2821 <para>See also the <link linkend="MSDFSROOT"><parameter>
2822 msdfs root</parameter></link> share level parameter. For
2823 more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba,
2824 refer to <ulink url="msdfs_setup.html">msdfs_setup.html</ulink>.
2825 </para>
2827 <para>Default: <command>host msdfs = no</command></para>
2828 </listitem>
2829 </varlistentry>
2832 <varlistentry>
2833 <term><anchor id="HOSTSALLOW">hosts allow (S)</term>
2834 <listitem><para>A synonym for this parameter is <parameter>allow
2835 hosts</parameter>.</para>
2837 <para>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited
2838 set of hosts which are permitted to access a service.</para>
2840 <para>If specified in the [global] section then it will
2841 apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual
2842 service has a different setting.</para>
2844 <para>You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For
2845 example, you could restrict access to only the hosts on a
2846 Class C subnet with something like <command>allow hosts = 150.203.5.
2847 </command>. The full syntax of the list is described in the man
2848 page <filename>hosts_access(5)</filename>. Note that this man
2849 page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will
2850 be given here also.</para>
2852 <para>Note that the localhost address 127.0.0.1 will always
2853 be allowed access unless specifically denied by a <link
2854 linkend="HOSTSDENY"><parameter>hosts deny</parameter></link> option.</para>
2856 <para>You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and
2857 by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups. The
2858 <emphasis>EXCEPT</emphasis> keyword can also be used to limit a
2859 wildcard list. The following examples may provide some help:</para>
2861 <para>Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.*; except one</para>
2863 <para><command>hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66</command></para>
2865 <para>Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask</para>
2867 <para><command>hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0</command></para>
2869 <para>Example 3: allow a couple of hosts</para>
2871 <para><command>hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur</command></para>
2873 <para>Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but
2874 deny access from one particular host</para>
2876 <para><command>hosts allow = @foonet</command></para>
2878 <para><command>hosts deny = pirate</command></para>
2880 <para>Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.</para>
2882 <para>See <ulink url="testparm.1.html"><command>testparm(1)</command>
2883 </ulink> for a way of testing your host access to see if it does
2884 what you expect.</para>
2886 <para>Default: <emphasis>none (i.e., all hosts permitted access)
2887 </emphasis></para>
2889 <para>Example: <command>allow hosts = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au
2890 </command></para>
2891 </listitem>
2892 </varlistentry>
2896 <varlistentry>
2897 <term><anchor id="HOSTSDENY">hosts deny (S)</term>
2898 <listitem><para>The opposite of <parameter>hosts allow</parameter>
2899 - hosts listed here are <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> permitted access to
2900 services unless the specific services have their own lists to override
2901 this one. Where the lists conflict, the <parameter>allow</parameter>
2902 list takes precedence.</para>
2904 <para>Default: <emphasis>none (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded)
2905 </emphasis></para>
2907 <para>Example: <command>hosts deny = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au
2908 </command></para></listitem>
2909 </varlistentry>
2913 <varlistentry>
2914 <term><anchor id="HOSTSEQUIV">hosts equiv (G)</term>
2915 <listitem><para>If this global parameter is a non-null string,
2916 it specifies the name of a file to read for the names of hosts
2917 and users who will be allowed access without specifying a password.
2918 </para>
2920 <para>This is not be confused with <link linkend="HOSTSALLOW">
2921 <parameter>hosts allow</parameter></link> which is about hosts
2922 access to services and is more useful for guest services. <parameter>
2923 hosts equiv</parameter> may be useful for NT clients which will
2924 not supply passwords to samba.</para>
2926 <para><emphasis>NOTE :</emphasis> The use of <parameter>hosts equiv
2927 </parameter> can be a major security hole. This is because you are
2928 trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to
2929 get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the
2930 <parameter>hosts equiv</parameter> option be only used if you really
2931 know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust
2932 your spouse and kids. And only if you <emphasis>really</emphasis> trust
2933 them :-).</para>
2935 <para>Default: <emphasis>no host equivalences</emphasis></para>
2936 <para>Example: <command>hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv</command></para>
2937 </listitem>
2938 </varlistentry>
2942 <varlistentry>
2943 <term><anchor id="INCLUDE">include (G)</term>
2944 <listitem><para>This allows you to include one config file
2945 inside another. The file is included literally, as though typed
2946 in place.</para>
2948 <para>It takes the standard substitutions, except <parameter>%u
2949 </parameter>, <parameter>%P</parameter> and <parameter>%S</parameter>.
2950 </para>
2952 <para>Default: <emphasis>no file included</emphasis></para>
2953 <para>Example: <command>include = /usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf
2954 </command></para></listitem>
2955 </varlistentry>
2959 <varlistentry>
2960 <term><anchor id="INHERITPERMISSIONS">inherit permissions (S)</term>
2961 <listitem><para>The permissions on new files and directories
2962 are normally governed by <link linkend="CREATEMASK"><parameter>
2963 create mask</parameter></link>, <link linkend="DIRECTORYMASK">
2964 <parameter>directory mask</parameter></link>, <link
2965 linkend="FORCECREATEMODE"><parameter>force create mode</parameter>
2966 </link> and <link linkend="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"><parameter>force
2967 directory mode</parameter></link> but the boolean inherit
2968 permissions parameter overrides this.</para>
2970 <para>New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory,
2971 including bits such as setgid.</para>
2973 <para>New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent
2974 directory. Their execute bits continue to be determined by
2975 <link linkend="MAPARCHIVE"><parameter>map archive</parameter>
2976 </link>, <link linkend="MAPHIDDEN"><parameter>map hidden</parameter>
2977 </link> and <link linkend="MAPSYSTEM"><parameter>map system</parameter>
2978 </link> as usual.</para>
2980 <para>Note that the setuid bit is <emphasis>never</emphasis> set via
2981 inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this).</para>
2983 <para>This can be particularly useful on large systems with
2984 many users, perhaps several thousand,to allow a single [homes]
2985 share to be used flexibly by each user.</para>
2987 <para>See also <link linkend="CREATEMASK"><parameter>create mask
2988 </parameter></link>, <link linkend="DIRECTORYMASK"><parameter>
2989 directory mask</parameter></link>, <link linkend="FORCECREATEMODE">
2990 <parameter>force create mode</parameter></link> and <link
2991 linkend="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"><parameter>force directory mode</parameter>
2992 </link>.</para>
2994 <para>Default: <command>inherit permissions = no</command></para>
2995 </listitem>
2996 </varlistentry>
3000 <varlistentry>
3001 <term><anchor id="INTERFACES">interfaces (G)</term>
3002 <listitem><para>This option allows you to override the default
3003 network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name
3004 registration and other NBT traffic. By default Samba will query
3005 the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any
3006 interfaces except 127.0.0.1 that are broadcast capable.</para>
3008 <para>The option takes a list of interface strings. Each string
3009 can be in any of the following forms:</para>
3011 <itemizedlist>
3012 <listitem><para>a network interface name (such as eth0).
3013 This may include shell-like wildcards so eth* will match
3014 any interface starting with the substring "eth"</para></listitem>
3016 <listitem><para>an IP address. In this case the netmask is
3017 determined from the list of interfaces obtained from the
3018 kernel</para></listitem>
3020 <listitem><para>an IP/mask pair. </para></listitem>
3022 <listitem><para>a broadcast/mask pair.</para></listitem>
3023 </itemizedlist>
3025 <para>The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such
3026 as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted
3027 decimal form.</para>
3029 <para>The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted
3030 decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via
3031 the OS's normal hostname resolution mechanisms.</para>
3033 <para>For example, the following line:</para>
3035 <para><command>interfaces = eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0
3036 </command></para>
3038 <para>would configure three network interfaces corresponding
3039 to the eth0 device and IP addresses 192.168.2.10 and 192.168.3.10.
3040 The netmasks of the latter two interfaces would be set to 255.255.255.0.</para>
3042 <para>See also <link linkend="BINDINTERFACESONLY"><parameter>bind
3043 interfaces only</parameter></link>.</para>
3045 <para>Default: <emphasis>all active interfaces except 127.0.0.1
3046 that are broadcast capable</emphasis></para>
3047 </listitem>
3048 </varlistentry>
3052 <varlistentry>
3053 <term><anchor id="INVALIDUSERS">invalid users (S)</term>
3054 <listitem><para>This is a list of users that should not be allowed
3055 to login to this service. This is really a <emphasis>paranoid</emphasis>
3056 check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach
3057 your security.</para>
3059 <para>A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS
3060 netgroup first (if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX
3061 group if the name was not found in the NIS netgroup database.</para>
3063 <para>A name starting with '+' is interpreted only
3064 by looking in the UNIX group database. A name starting with
3065 '&' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database
3066 (this requires NIS to be working on your system). The characters
3067 '+' and '&' may be used at the start of the name in either order
3068 so the value <parameter>+&amp;group</parameter> means check the
3069 UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and
3070 the value <parameter>&+group"</parameter> means check the NIS
3071 netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the
3072 same as the '@' prefix).</para>
3074 <para>The current servicename is substituted for <parameter>%S</parameter>.
3075 This is useful in the [homes] section.</para>
3077 <para>See also <link linkend="VALIDUSERS"><parameter>valid users
3078 </parameter></link>.</para>
3080 <para>Default: <emphasis>no invalid users</emphasis></para>
3081 <para>Example: <command>invalid users = root fred admin @wheel
3082 </command></para>
3083 </listitem>
3084 </varlistentry>
3088 <varlistentry>
3089 <term><anchor id="KEEPALIVE">keepalive (G)</term>
3090 <listitem><para>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents
3091 the number of seconds between <parameter>keepalive</parameter>
3092 packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be
3093 sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether
3094 a client is still present and responding.</para>
3096 <para>Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket
3097 being used has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it (see <link
3098 linkend="SOCKETOPTIONS"><parameter>socket options</parameter></link>).
3099 Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties.</para>
3101 <para>Default: <command>keepalive = 300</command></para>
3102 <para>Example: <command>keepalive = 600</command></para>
3103 </listitem>
3104 </varlistentry>
3108 <varlistentry>
3109 <term><anchor id="KERNELOPLOCKS">kernel oplocks (G)</term>
3110 <listitem><para>For UNIXes that support kernel based <link
3111 linkend="OPLOCKS"><parameter>oplocks</parameter></link>
3112 (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter
3113 allows the use of them to be turned on or off.</para>
3115 <para>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <parameter>oplocks
3116 </parameter> to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation
3117 accesses a file that <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command>
3118 </ulink> has oplocked. This allows complete data consistency between
3119 SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a <emphasis>very</emphasis>
3120 cool feature :-).</para>
3122 <para>This parameter defaults to <constant>on</constant> on systems
3123 that have the support, and <constant>off</constant> on systems that
3124 don't. You should never need to touch this parameter.</para>
3126 <para>See also the <link linkend="OPLOCKS"><parameter>oplocks</parameter>
3127 </link> and <link linkend="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"><parameter>level2 oplocks
3128 </parameter></link> parameters.</para>
3130 <para>Default: <command>kernel oplocks = yes</command></para>
3131 </listitem>
3132 </varlistentry>
3137 <varlistentry>
3138 <term><anchor id="LANMANAUTH">lanman auth (G)</term>
3139 <listitem><para>This parameter determines whether or not smbd will
3140 attempt to authentication users using the LANMAN password hash.
3141 If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows
3142 NT/2000 clients, smbclient, etc... but not Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS
3143 network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host.</para>
3145 <para>Default : <command>lanman auth = yes</command></para>
3146 </listitem>
3147 </varlistentry>
3152 <varlistentry>
3153 <term><anchor id="LEVEL2OPLOCKS">level2 oplocks (S)</term>
3154 <listitem><para>This parameter controls whether Samba supports
3155 level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share.</para>
3157 <para>Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients
3158 that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock
3159 to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead
3160 of releasing all oplocks on a second open, as in traditional,
3161 exclusive oplocks). This allows all openers of the file that
3162 support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read-ahead only (ie.
3163 they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases performance
3164 for many accesses of files that are not commonly written (such as
3165 application .EXE files).</para>
3167 <para>Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock
3168 writes to the file all clients are notified (no reply is needed
3169 or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and
3170 delete any read-ahead caches.</para>
3172 <para>It is recommended that this parameter be turned on
3173 to speed access to shared executables.</para>
3175 <para>For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec.</para>
3177 <para>Currently, if <link linkend="KERNELOPLOCKS"><parameter>kernel
3178 oplocks</parameter></link> are supported then level2 oplocks are
3179 not granted (even if this parameter is set to <constant>yes</constant>).
3180 Note also, the <link linkend="OPLOCKS"><parameter>oplocks</parameter>
3181 </link> parameter must be set to "true" on this share in order for
3182 this parameter to have any effect.</para>
3184 <para>See also the <link linkend="OPLOCKS"><parameter>oplocks</parameter>
3185 </link> and <link linkend="OPLOCKS"><parameter>kernel oplocks</parameter>
3186 </link> parameters.</para>
3188 <para>Default: <command>level2 oplocks = yes</command></para>
3189 </listitem>
3190 </varlistentry>
3196 <varlistentry>
3197 <term><anchor id="LMANNOUNCE">lm announce (G)</term>
3198 <listitem><para>This parameter determines if <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">
3199 <command>nmbd(8)</command></ulink> will produce Lanman announce
3200 broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see
3201 the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have three
3202 values, <constant>true</constant>, <constant>false</constant>, or
3203 <constant>auto</constant>. The default is <constant>auto</constant>.
3204 If set to <constant>false</constant> Samba will never produce these
3205 broadcasts. If set to <constant>true</constant> Samba will produce
3206 Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter
3207 <parameter>lm interval</parameter>. If set to <constant>auto</constant>
3208 Samba will not send Lanman announce broadcasts by default but will
3209 listen for them. If it hears such a broadcast on the wire it will
3210 then start sending them at a frequency set by the parameter
3211 <parameter>lm interval</parameter>.</para>
3213 <para>See also <link linkend="LMINTERVAL"><parameter>lm interval
3214 </parameter></link>.</para>
3216 <para>Default: <command>lm announce = auto</command></para>
3217 <para>Example: <command>lm announce = yes</command></para>
3218 </listitem>
3219 </varlistentry>
3223 <varlistentry>
3224 <term><anchor id="LMINTERVAL">lm interval (G)</term>
3225 <listitem><para>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce
3226 broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the <link linkend="LMANNOUNCE">
3227 <parameter>lm announce</parameter></link> parameter) then this
3228 parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be
3229 made. If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be
3230 made despite the setting of the <parameter>lm announce</parameter>
3231 parameter.</para>
3233 <para>See also <link linkend="LMANNOUNCE"><parameter>lm
3234 announce</parameter></link>.</para>
3236 <para>Default: <command>lm interval = 60</command></para>
3237 <para>Example: <command>lm interval = 120</command></para>
3238 </listitem>
3239 </varlistentry>
3243 <varlistentry>
3244 <term><anchor id="LOADPRINTERS">load printers (G)</term>
3245 <listitem><para>A boolean variable that controls whether all
3246 printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default.
3247 See the <link linkend="PRINTERSSECT">printers</link> section for
3248 more details.</para>
3250 <para>Default: <command>load printers = yes</command></para></listitem>
3251 </varlistentry>
3256 <varlistentry>
3257 <term><anchor id="LOCALMASTER">local master (G)</term>
3258 <listitem><para>This option allows <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command>
3259 nmbd(8)</command></ulink> to try and become a local master browser
3260 on a subnet. If set to <constant>False</constant> then <command>
3261 nmbd</command> will not attempt to become a local master browser
3262 on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By
3263 default this value is set to true. Setting this value to true doesn't
3264 mean that Samba will <emphasis>become</emphasis> the local master
3265 browser on a subnet, just that <command>nmbd</command> will <emphasis>
3266 participate</emphasis> in elections for local master browser.</para>
3268 <para>Setting this value to False will cause <command>nmbd</command>
3269 <emphasis>never</emphasis> to become a local master browser.</para>
3271 <para>Default: <command>local master = yes</command></para>
3272 </listitem>
3273 </varlistentry>
3277 <varlistentry>
3278 <term><anchor id="LOCKDIR">lock dir (G)</term>
3279 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="LOCKDIRECTORY"><parameter>
3280 lock directory</parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
3281 </varlistentry>
3285 <varlistentry>
3286 <term><anchor id="LOCKDIRECTORY">lock directory (G)</term>
3287 <listitem><para>This option specifies the directory where lock
3288 files will be placed. The lock files are used to implement the
3289 <link linkend="MAXCONNECTIONS"><parameter>max connections</parameter>
3290 </link> option.</para>
3292 <para>Default: <command>lock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks</command></para>
3293 <para>Example: <command>lock directory = /var/run/samba/locks</command>
3294 </para></listitem>
3295 </varlistentry>
3299 <varlistentry>
3300 <term><anchor id="LOCKING">locking (S)</term>
3301 <listitem><para>This controls whether or not locking will be
3302 performed by the server in response to lock requests from the
3303 client.</para>
3305 <para>If <command>locking = no</command>, all lock and unlock
3306 requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report
3307 that the file in question is available for locking.</para>
3309 <para>If <command>locking = yes</command>, real locking will be performed
3310 by the server.</para>
3312 <para>This option <emphasis>may</emphasis> be useful for read-only
3313 filesystems which <emphasis>may</emphasis> not need locking (such as
3314 cdrom drives), although setting this parameter of <constant>no</constant>
3315 is not really recommended even in this case.</para>
3317 <para>Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a
3318 specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption.
3319 You should never need to set this parameter.</para>
3321 <para>Default: <command>locking = yes</command></para>
3322 </listitem>
3323 </varlistentry>
3327 <varlistentry>
3328 <term><anchor id="LOGFILE">log file (G)</term>
3329 <listitem><para>This option allows you to override the name
3330 of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file).</para>
3332 <para>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing
3333 you to have separate log files for each user or machine.</para>
3335 <para>Example: <command>log file = /usr/local/samba/var/log.%m
3336 </command></para></listitem>
3337 </varlistentry>
3341 <varlistentry>
3342 <term><anchor id="LOGLEVEL">log level (G)</term>
3343 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="DEBUGLEVEL"><parameter>
3344 debug level</parameter></link>.</para>
3345 </listitem>
3346 </varlistentry>
3350 <varlistentry>
3351 <term><anchor id="LOGONDRIVE">logon drive (G)</term>
3352 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the local path to
3353 which the home directory will be connected (see <link
3354 linkend="LOGONHOME"><parameter>logon home</parameter></link>)
3355 and is only used by NT Workstations. </para>
3357 <para>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a
3358 logon server.</para>
3360 <para>Default: <command>logon drive = z:</command></para>
3361 <para>Example: <command>logon drive = h:</command></para>
3362 </listitem>
3363 </varlistentry>
3367 <varlistentry>
3368 <term><anchor id="LOGONHOME">logon home (G)</term>
3369 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the home directory
3370 location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC.
3371 It allows you to do </para>
3373 <para><prompt>C:\> </prompt><userinput>NET USE H: /HOME</userinput>
3374 </para>
3376 <para>from a command prompt, for example.</para>
3378 <para>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing
3379 you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</para>
3381 <para>This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure
3382 that roaming profiles are stored in a subdirectory of the user's
3383 home directory. This is done in the following way:</para>
3385 <para><command>logon home = \\%N\%U\profile</command></para>
3387 <para>This tells Samba to return the above string, with
3388 substitutions made when a client requests the info, generally
3389 in a NetUserGetInfo request. Win9X clients truncate the info to
3390 \\server\share when a user does <command>net use /home"</command>
3391 but use the whole string when dealing with profiles.</para>
3393 <para>Note that in prior versions of Samba, the <link linkend="LOGONPATH">
3394 <parameter>logon path</parameter></link> was returned rather than
3395 <parameter>logon home</parameter>. This broke <command>net use
3396 /home</command> but allowed profiles outside the home directory.
3397 The current implementation is correct, and can be used for
3398 profiles if you use the above trick.</para>
3400 <para>This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon
3401 server.</para>
3403 <para>Default: <command>logon home = "\\%N\%U"</command></para>
3404 <para>Example: <command>logon home = "\\remote_smb_server\%U"</command>
3405 </para></listitem>
3406 </varlistentry>
3409 <varlistentry>
3410 <term><anchor id="LOGONPATH">logon path (G)</term>
3411 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the home directory
3412 where roaming profiles (NTuser.dat etc files for Windows NT) are
3413 stored. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has
3414 nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles. To find out how to
3415 handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the <link linkend="LOGONHOME">
3416 <parameter>logon home</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
3418 <para>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you
3419 to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine. It also
3420 specifies the directory from which the "Application Data",
3421 (<filename>desktop</filename>, <filename>start menu</filename>,
3422 <filename>network neighborhood</filename>, <filename>programs</filename>
3423 and other folders, and their contents, are loaded and displayed on
3424 your Windows NT client.</para>
3426 <para>The share and the path must be readable by the user for
3427 the preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT
3428 client. The share must be writeable when the logs in for the first
3429 time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the NTuser.dat
3430 and other directories.</para>
3432 <para>Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can,
3433 if required, be made read-only. It is not advisable that the
3434 NTuser.dat file be made read-only - rename it to NTuser.man to
3435 achieve the desired effect (a <emphasis>MAN</emphasis>datory
3436 profile). </para>
3438 <para>Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to
3439 the [homes] share, even though there is no user logged in.
3440 Therefore, it is vital that the logon path does not include a
3441 reference to the homes share (i.e. setting this parameter to
3442 \%N\%U\profile_path will cause problems).</para>
3444 <para>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing
3445 you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</para>
3447 <para>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up
3448 as a logon server.</para>
3450 <para>Default: <command>logon path = \\%N\%U\profile</command></para>
3451 <para>Example: <command>logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U</command></para>
3452 </listitem>
3453 </varlistentry>
3457 <varlistentry>
3458 <term><anchor id="LOGONSCRIPT">logon script (G)</term>
3459 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the batch file (.bat) or
3460 NT command file (.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when
3461 a user successfully logs in. The file must contain the DOS
3462 style cr/lf line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the
3463 file is recommended.</para>
3465 <para>The script must be a relative path to the [netlogon]
3466 service. If the [netlogon] service specifies a <link linkend="PATH">
3467 <parameter>path</parameter></link> of <filename>/usr/local/samba/netlogon
3468 </filename>, and <command>logon script = STARTUP.BAT</command>, then
3469 the file that will be downloaded is:</para>
3471 <para><filename>/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT</filename></para>
3473 <para>The contents of the batch file is entirely your choice. A
3474 suggested command would be to add <command>NET TIME \\SERVER /SET
3475 /YES</command>, to force every machine to synchronize clocks with
3476 the same time server. Another use would be to add <command>NET USE
3477 U: \\SERVER\UTILS</command> for commonly used utilities, or <command>
3478 NET USE Q: \\SERVER\ISO9001_QA</command> for example.</para>
3480 <para>Note that it is particularly important not to allow write
3481 access to the [netlogon] share, or to grant users write permission
3482 on the batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow
3483 the batch files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be
3484 breached.</para>
3486 <para>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you
3487 to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</para>
3489 <para>This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon
3490 server.</para>
3492 <para>Default: <emphasis>no logon script defined</emphasis></para>
3493 <para>Example: <command>logon script = scripts\%U.bat</command></para>
3494 </listitem>
3495 </varlistentry>
3499 <varlistentry>
3500 <term><anchor id="LPPAUSECOMMAND">lppause command (S)</term>
3501 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be
3502 executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling
3503 a specific print job.</para>
3505 <para>This command should be a program or script which takes
3506 a printer name and job number to pause the print job. One way
3507 of implementing this is by using job priorities, where jobs
3508 having a too low priority won't be sent to the printer.</para>
3510 <para>If a <parameter>%p</parameter> is given then the printername
3511 is put in its place. A <parameter>%j</parameter> is replaced with
3512 the job number (an integer). On HPUX (see <parameter>printing=hpux
3513 </parameter>), if the <parameter>-p%p</parameter> option is added
3514 to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status, i.e.
3515 if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will
3516 have the PAUSED status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it
3517 will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status.</para>
3519 <para>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path
3520 in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</para>
3522 <para>See also the <link linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing
3523 </parameter></link> parameter.</para>
3525 <para>Default: Currently no default value is given to
3526 this string, unless the value of the <parameter>printing</parameter>
3527 parameter is <constant>SYSV</constant>, in which case the default is :</para>
3529 <para><command>lp -i %p-%j -H hold</command></para>
3531 <para>or if the value of the <parameter>printing</parameter> parameter
3532 is <constant>SOFTQ</constant>, then the default is:</para>
3534 <para><command>qstat -s -j%j -h</command></para>
3536 <para>Example for HPUX: <command>lppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt
3537 %p-%j -p0</command></para>
3538 </listitem>
3539 </varlistentry>
3543 <varlistentry>
3544 <term><anchor id="LPQCACHETIME">lpq cache time (G)</term>
3545 <listitem><para>This controls how long lpq info will be cached
3546 for to prevent the <command>lpq</command> command being called too
3547 often. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the <command>
3548 lpq</command> command used by the system, so if you use different
3549 <command>lpq</command> commands for different users then they won't
3550 share cache information.</para>
3552 <para>The cache files are stored in <filename>/tmp/lpq.xxxx</filename>
3553 where xxxx is a hash of the <command>lpq</command> command in use.</para>
3555 <para>The default is 10 seconds, meaning that the cached results
3556 of a previous identical <command>lpq</command> command will be used
3557 if the cached data is less than 10 seconds old. A large value may
3558 be advisable if your <command>lpq</command> command is very slow.</para>
3560 <para>A value of 0 will disable caching completely.</para>
3562 <para>See also the <link linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing
3563 </parameter></link> parameter.</para>
3565 <para>Default: <command>lpq cache time = 10</command></para>
3566 <para>Example: <command>lpq cache time = 30</command></para>
3567 </listitem>
3568 </varlistentry>
3572 <varlistentry>
3573 <term><anchor id="LPQCOMMAND">lpq command (S)</term>
3574 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be
3575 executed on the server host in order to obtain <command>lpq
3576 </command>-style printer status information.</para>
3578 <para>This command should be a program or script which
3579 takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer
3580 status information.</para>
3582 <para>Currently eight styles of printer status information
3583 are supported; BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX and SOFTQ.
3584 This covers most UNIX systems. You control which type is expected
3585 using the <parameter>printing =</parameter> option.</para>
3587 <para>Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not
3588 correctly send the connection number for the printer they are
3589 requesting status information about. To get around this, the
3590 server reports on the first printer service connected to by the
3591 client. This only happens if the connection number sent is invalid.</para>
3593 <para>If a <parameter>%p</parameter> is given then the printername
3594 is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the
3595 command.</para>
3597 <para>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path
3598 in the <parameter>lpq command</parameter> as the <envar>$PATH
3599 </envar> may not be available to the server.</para>
3601 <para>See also the <link linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing
3602 </parameter></link> parameter.</para>
3604 <para>Default: <emphasis>depends on the setting of <parameter>
3605 printing</parameter></emphasis></para>
3607 <para>Example: <command>lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p</command></para>
3608 </listitem>
3609 </varlistentry>
3613 <varlistentry>
3614 <term><anchor id="LPRESUMECOMMAND">lpresume command (S)</term>
3615 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be
3616 executed on the server host in order to restart or continue
3617 printing or spooling a specific print job.</para>
3619 <para>This command should be a program or script which takes
3620 a printer name and job number to resume the print job. See
3621 also the <link linkend="LPPAUSECOMMAND"><parameter>lppause command
3622 </parameter></link> parameter.</para>
3624 <para>If a <parameter>%p</parameter> is given then the printername
3625 is put in its place. A <parameter>%j</parameter> is replaced with
3626 the job number (an integer).</para>
3628 <para>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path
3629 in the <parameter>lpresume command</parameter> as the PATH may not
3630 be available to the server.</para>
3632 <para>See also the <link linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing
3633 </parameter></link> parameter.</para>
3635 <para>Default: Currently no default value is given
3636 to this string, unless the value of the <parameter>printing</parameter>
3637 parameter is <constant>SYSV</constant>, in which case the default is :</para>
3639 <para><command>lp -i %p-%j -H resume</command></para>
3641 <para>or if the value of the <parameter>printing</parameter> parameter
3642 is <constant>SOFTQ</constant>, then the default is:</para>
3644 <para><command>qstat -s -j%j -r</command></para>
3646 <para>Example for HPUX: <command>lpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt
3647 %p-%j -p2</command></para>
3648 </listitem>
3649 </varlistentry>
3653 <varlistentry>
3654 <term><anchor id="LPRMCOMMAND">lprm command (S)</term>
3655 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be
3656 executed on the server host in order to delete a print job.</para>
3658 <para>This command should be a program or script which takes
3659 a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job.</para>
3661 <para>If a <parameter>%p</parameter> is given then the printername
3662 is put in its place. A <parameter>%j</parameter> is replaced with
3663 the job number (an integer).</para>
3665 <para>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute
3666 path in the <parameter>lprm command</parameter> as the PATH may not be
3667 available to the server.</para>
3669 <para>See also the <link linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing
3670 </parameter></link> parameter.</para>
3672 <para>Default: <emphasis>depends on the setting of <parameter>printing
3673 </parameter></emphasis></para>
3675 <para>Example 1: <command>lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j
3676 </command></para>
3677 <para>Example 2: <command>lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j
3678 </command></para></listitem>
3679 </varlistentry>
3683 <varlistentry>
3684 <term><anchor id="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT">machine password timeout (G)</term>
3685 <listitem><para>If a Samba server is a member of an Windows
3686 NT Domain (see the <link linkend="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN">security=domain</link>)
3687 parameter) then periodically a running <ulink url="smbd.8.html">
3688 smbd(8)</ulink> process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT
3689 PASSWORD stored in the TDB called <filename>private/secrets.tdb
3690 </filename>. This parameter specifies how often this password
3691 will be changed, in seconds. The default is one week (expressed in
3692 seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server.</para>
3694 <para>See also <ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command>smbpasswd(8)
3695 </command></ulink>, and the <link linkend="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN">
3696 security=domain</link>) parameter.</para>
3698 <para>Default: <command>machine password timeout = 604800</command></para>
3699 </listitem>
3700 </varlistentry>
3703 <varlistentry>
3704 <term><anchor id="MAGICOUTPUT">magic output (S)</term>
3705 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the name of a file
3706 which will contain output created by a magic script (see the
3707 <link linkend="MAGICSCRIPT"><parameter>magic script</parameter></link>
3708 parameter below).</para>
3710 <para>Warning: If two clients use the same <parameter>magic script
3711 </parameter> in the same directory the output file content
3712 is undefined.</para>
3714 <para>Default: <command>magic output = &lt;magic script name&gt;.out
3715 </command></para>
3717 <para>Example: <command>magic output = myfile.txt</command></para>
3718 </listitem>
3719 </varlistentry>
3723 <varlistentry>
3724 <term><anchor id="MAGICSCRIPT">magic script (S)</term>
3725 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the name of a file which,
3726 if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed.
3727 This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and
3728 executed on behalf of the connected user.</para>
3730 <para>Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon
3731 completion assuming that the user has the appripriate level
3732 of priviledge and the ile permissions allow the deletion.</para>
3734 <para>If the script generates output, output will be sent to
3735 the file specified by the <link linkend="MAGICOUTPUT"><parameter>
3736 magic output</parameter></link> parameter (see above).</para>
3738 <para>Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts
3739 containing CR/LF instead of CR as
3740 the end-of-line marker. Magic scripts must be executable
3741 <emphasis>as is</emphasis> on the host, which for some hosts and
3742 some shells will require filtering at the DOS end.</para>
3744 <para>Magic scripts are <emphasis>EXPERIMENTAL</emphasis> and
3745 should <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> be relied upon.</para>
3747 <para>Default: <emphasis>None. Magic scripts disabled.</emphasis></para>
3748 <para>Example: <command>magic script = user.csh</command></para>
3749 </listitem>
3750 </varlistentry>
3754 <varlistentry>
3755 <term><anchor id="MANGLECASE">mangle case (S)</term>
3756 <listitem><para>See the section on <link linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT">
3757 NAME MANGLING</link></para>
3759 <para>Default: <command>mangle case = no</command></para>
3760 </listitem>
3761 </varlistentry>
3764 <varlistentry>
3765 <term><anchor id="MANGLEDMAP">mangled map (S)</term>
3766 <listitem><para>This is for those who want to directly map UNIX
3767 file names which can not be represented on Windows/DOS. The mangling
3768 of names is not always what is needed. In particular you may have
3769 documents with file extensions that differ between DOS and UNIX.
3770 For example, under UNIX it is common to use <filename>.html</filename>
3771 for HTML files, whereas under Windows/DOS <filename>.htm</filename>
3772 is more commonly used.</para>
3774 <para>So to map <filename>html</filename> to <filename>htm</filename>
3775 you would use:</para>
3777 <para><command>mangled map = (*.html *.htm)</command></para>
3779 <para>One very useful case is to remove the annoying <filename>;1
3780 </filename> off the ends of filenames on some CDROMS (only visible
3781 under some UNIXes). To do this use a map of (*;1 *;).</para>
3783 <para>Default: <emphasis>no mangled map</emphasis></para>
3784 <para>Example: <command>mangled map = (*;1 *;)</command></para>
3785 </listitem>
3786 </varlistentry>
3789 <varlistentry>
3790 <term><anchor id="MANGLEDNAMES">mangled names (S)</term>
3791 <listitem><para>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX
3792 should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible,
3793 or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</para>
3795 <para>See the section on <link linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT">
3796 NAME MANGLING</link> for details on how to control the mangling process.</para>
3798 <para>If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:</para>
3800 <itemizedlist>
3801 <listitem><para>The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters
3802 before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced
3803 to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters
3804 of the mangled name.</para></listitem>
3806 <listitem><para>A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled
3807 name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the
3808 original root name (i.e., the original filename minus its final
3809 extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation
3810 only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three
3811 characters.</para>
3813 <para>Note that the character to use may be specified using
3814 the <link linkend="MANGLINGCHAR"><parameter>mangling char</parameter>
3815 </link> option, if you don't like '~'.</para></listitem>
3817 <listitem><para>The first three alphanumeric characters of the final
3818 extension are preserved, forced to upper case and appear as the
3819 extension of the mangled name. The final extension is defined as that
3820 part of the original filename after the rightmost dot. If there are no
3821 dots in the filename, the mangled name will have no extension (except
3822 in the case of "hidden files" - see below).</para></listitem>
3824 <listitem><para>Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be
3825 presented as DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as
3826 for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as
3827 its extension regardless of actual original extension (that's three
3828 underscores).</para></listitem>
3829 </itemizedlist>
3831 <para>The two-digit hash value consists of upper case
3832 alphanumeric characters.</para>
3834 <para>This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files
3835 in a directory share the same first five alphanumeric characters.
3836 The probability of such a clash is 1/1300.</para>
3838 <para>The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be
3839 copied between UNIX directories from Windows/DOS while retaining
3840 the long UNIX filename. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension
3841 from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names
3842 do not change between sessions.</para>
3844 <para>Default: <command>mangled names = yes</command></para>
3845 </listitem>
3846 </varlistentry>
3850 <varlistentry>
3851 <term><anchor id="MANGLEDSTACK">mangled stack (G)</term>
3852 <listitem><para>This parameter controls the number of mangled names
3853 that should be cached in the Samba server <ulink url="smbd.8.html">
3854 smbd(8)</ulink>.</para>
3856 <para>This stack is a list of recently mangled base names
3857 (extensions are only maintained if they are longer than 3 characters
3858 or contains upper case characters).</para>
3860 <para>The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled
3861 names can be successfully converted to correct long UNIX names.
3862 However, large stack sizes will slow most directory access. Smaller
3863 stacks save memory in the server (each stack element costs 256 bytes).
3864 </para>
3866 <para>It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long
3867 file names, so be prepared for some surprises!</para>
3869 <para>Default: <command>mangled stack = 50</command></para>
3870 <para>Example: <command>mangled stack = 100</command></para>
3871 </listitem>
3872 </varlistentry>
3877 <varlistentry>
3878 <term><anchor id="MANGLINGCHAR">mangling char (S)</term>
3879 <listitem><para>This controls what character is used as
3880 the <emphasis>magic</emphasis> character in <link
3881 linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT">name mangling</link>. The default is a '~'
3882 but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set
3883 it to whatever you prefer.</para>
3885 <para>Default: <command>mangling char = ~</command></para>
3886 <para>Example: <command>mangling char = ^</command></para>
3887 </listitem>
3888 </varlistentry>
3894 <varlistentry>
3895 <term><anchor id="MAPARCHIVE">map archive (S)</term>
3896 <listitem><para>This controls whether the DOS archive attribute
3897 should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit
3898 is set when a file has been modified since its last backup. One
3899 motivation for this option it to keep Samba/your PC from making
3900 any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX. This can
3901 be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc...</para>
3903 <para>Note that this requires the <parameter>create mask</parameter>
3904 parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out
3905 (i.e. it must include 100). See the parameter <link linkend="CREATEMASK">
3906 <parameter>create mask</parameter></link> for details.</para>
3908 <para>Default: <command>map archive = yes</command></para>
3909 </listitem>
3910 </varlistentry>
3914 <varlistentry>
3915 <term><anchor id="MAPHIDDEN">map hidden (S)</term>
3916 <listitem><para>This controls whether DOS style hidden files
3917 should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit.</para>
3919 <para>Note that this requires the <parameter>create mask</parameter>
3920 to be set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i.e.
3921 it must include 001). See the parameter <link linkend="CREATEMASK">
3922 <parameter>create mask</parameter></link> for details.</para>
3924 <para>Default: <command>map hidden = no</command></para>
3925 </listitem>
3926 </varlistentry>
3929 <varlistentry>
3930 <term><anchor id="MAPSYSTEM">map system (S)</term>
3931 <listitem><para>This controls whether DOS style system files
3932 should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit.</para>
3934 <para>Note that this requires the <parameter>create mask</parameter>
3935 to be set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i.e.
3936 it must include 010). See the parameter <link linkend="CREATEMASK">
3937 <parameter>create mask</parameter></link> for details.</para>
3939 <para>Default: <command>map system = no</command></para>
3940 </listitem>
3941 </varlistentry>
3944 <varlistentry>
3945 <term><anchor id="MAPTOGUEST">map to guest (G)</term>
3946 <listitem><para>This parameter is only useful in <link linkend="SECURITY">
3947 security</link> modes other than <parameter>security=share</parameter>
3948 - i.e. <constant>user</constant>, <constant>server</constant>,
3949 and <constant>domain</constant>.</para>
3951 <para>This parameter can take three different values, which tell
3952 <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> what to do with user
3953 login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way.</para>
3955 <para>The three settings are :</para>
3957 <itemizedlist>
3958 <listitem><para><constant>Never</constant> - Means user login
3959 requests with an invalid password are rejected. This is the
3960 default.</para></listitem>
3962 <listitem><para><constant>Bad User</constant> - Means user
3963 logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username
3964 does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and
3965 mapped into the <link linkend="GUESTACCOUNT"><parameter>
3966 guest account</parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
3968 <listitem><para><constant>Bad Password</constant> - Means user logins
3969 with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped
3970 into the <link linkend="GUESTACCOUNT">guest account</link>. Note that
3971 this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing
3972 their password will be silently logged on as "guest" - and
3973 will not know the reason they cannot access files they think
3974 they should - there will have been no message given to them
3975 that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services will
3976 <emphasis>hate</emphasis> you if you set the <parameter>map to
3977 guest</parameter> parameter this way :-).</para></listitem>
3978 </itemizedlist>
3980 <para>Note that this parameter is needed to set up "Guest"
3981 share services when using <parameter>security</parameter> modes other than
3982 share. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being
3983 requested is <emphasis>not</emphasis> sent to the server until after
3984 the server has successfully authenticated the client so the server
3985 cannot make authentication decisions at the correct time (connection
3986 to the share) for "Guest" shares.</para>
3988 <para>For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this
3989 parameter maps to the old compile-time setting of the <constant>
3990 GUEST_SESSSETUP</constant> value in local.h.</para>
3992 <para>Default: <command>map to guest = Never</command></para>
3993 <para>Example: <command>map to guest = Bad User</command></para>
3994 </listitem>
3995 </varlistentry>
3999 <varlistentry>
4000 <term><anchor id="MAXCONNECTIONS">max connections (S)</term>
4001 <listitem><para>This option allows the number of simultaneous
4002 connections to a service to be limited. If <parameter>max connections
4003 </parameter> is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if
4004 this number of connections to the service are already open. A value
4005 of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made.</para>
4007 <para>Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The
4008 lock files will be stored in the directory specified by the <link
4009 linkend="LOCKDIRECTORY"><parameter>lock directory</parameter></link>
4010 option.</para>
4012 <para>Default: <command>max connections = 0</command></para>
4013 <para>Example: <command>max connections = 10</command></para>
4014 </listitem>
4015 </varlistentry>
4019 <varlistentry>
4020 <term><anchor id="MAXDISKSIZE">max disk size (G)</term>
4021 <listitem><para>This option allows you to put an upper limit
4022 on the apparent size of disks. If you set this option to 100
4023 then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in
4024 size.</para>
4026 <para>Note that this option does not limit the amount of
4027 data you can put on the disk. In the above case you could still
4028 store much more than 100 MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks
4029 for the amount of free disk space or the total disk size then the
4030 result will be bounded by the amount specified in <parameter>max
4031 disk size</parameter>.</para>
4033 <para>This option is primarily useful to work around bugs
4034 in some pieces of software that can't handle very large disks,
4035 particularly disks over 1GB in size.</para>
4037 <para>A <parameter>max disk size</parameter> of 0 means no limit.</para>
4039 <para>Default: <command>max disk size = 0</command></para>
4040 <para>Example: <command>max disk size = 1000</command></para>
4041 </listitem>
4042 </varlistentry>
4046 <varlistentry>
4047 <term><anchor id="MAXLOGSIZE">max log size (G)</term>
4048 <listitem><para>This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies
4049 the max size the log file should grow to. Samba periodically checks
4050 the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding
4051 a <filename>.old</filename> extension.</para>
4053 <para>A size of 0 means no limit.</para>
4055 <para>Default: <command>max log size = 5000</command></para>
4056 <para>Example: <command>max log size = 1000</command></para>
4057 </listitem>
4058 </varlistentry>
4062 <varlistentry>
4063 <term><anchor id="MAXMUX">max mux (G)</term>
4064 <listitem><para>This option controls the maximum number of
4065 outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that samba tells the client
4066 it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.</para>
4068 <para>Default: <command>max mux = 50</command></para>
4069 </listitem>
4070 </varlistentry>
4074 <varlistentry>
4075 <term><anchor id="MAXOPENFILES">max open files (G)</term>
4076 <listitem><para>This parameter limits the maximum number of
4077 open files that one <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> file
4078 serving process may have open for a client at any one time. The
4079 default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses
4080 only one bit per unopened file.</para>
4082 <para>The limit of the number of open files is usually set
4083 by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than
4084 this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter.</para>
4086 <para>Default: <command>max open files = 10000</command></para>
4087 </listitem>
4088 </varlistentry>
4092 <varlistentry>
4093 <term><anchor id="MAXPRINTJOBS">max print jobs (S)</term>
4094 <listitem><para>This parameter limits the maximum number of
4095 jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment.
4096 If this number is exceeded, <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>
4097 smbd(8)</command></ulink> will remote "Out of Space" to the client.
4098 See all <link linkend="TOTALPRINTJOBS"><parameter>total
4099 print jobs</parameter></link>.
4100 </para>
4102 <para>Default: <command>max print jobs = 1000</command></para>
4103 <para>Example: <command>max print jobs = 5000</command></para>
4104 </listitem>
4105 </varlistentry>
4108 <varlistentry>
4109 <term><anchor id="MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol (G)</term>
4110 <listitem><para>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest
4111 protocol level that will be supported by the server.</para>
4113 <para>Possible values are :</para>
4114 <itemizedlist>
4115 <listitem><para><constant>CORE</constant>: Earliest version. No
4116 concept of user names.</para></listitem>
4118 <listitem><para><constant>COREPLUS</constant>: Slight improvements on
4119 CORE for efficiency.</para></listitem>
4121 <listitem><para><constant>LANMAN1</constant>: First <emphasis>
4122 modern</emphasis> version of the protocol. Long filename
4123 support.</para></listitem>
4125 <listitem><para><constant>LANMAN2</constant>: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.
4126 </para></listitem>
4128 <listitem><para><constant>NT1</constant>: Current up to date version of
4129 the protocol. Used by Windows NT. Known as CIFS.</para></listitem>
4130 </itemizedlist>
4132 <para>Normally this option should not be set as the automatic
4133 negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing
4134 the appropriate protocol.</para>
4136 <para>See also <link linkend="MINPROTOCOL"><parameter>min
4137 protocol</parameter></link></para>
4139 <para>Default: <command>max protocol = NT1</command></para>
4140 <para>Example: <command>max protocol = LANMAN1</command></para>
4141 </listitem>
4142 </varlistentry>
4146 <varlistentry>
4147 <term><anchor id="MAXSMBDPROCESSES">max smbd processes (G)</term>
4148 <listitem><para>This parameter limits the maximum number of
4149 <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>
4150 processes concurrently running on a system and is intended
4151 as a stop gap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event
4152 that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this
4153 number of connections. Remember that under normal operating
4154 conditions, each user will have an smbd associated with him or her
4155 to handle connections to all shares from a given host.
4156 </para>
4158 <para>Default: <command>max smbd processes = 0</command> ## no limit</para>
4159 <para>Example: <command>max smbd processes = 1000</command></para>
4160 </listitem>
4161 </varlistentry>
4166 <varlistentry>
4167 <term><anchor id="MAXTTL">max ttl (G)</term>
4168 <listitem><para>This option tells <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink>
4169 what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds)
4170 when <command>nmbd</command> is requesting a name using either a
4171 broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to
4172 change this parameter. The default is 3 days.</para>
4174 <para>Default: <command>max ttl = 259200</command></para>
4175 </listitem>
4176 </varlistentry>
4180 <varlistentry>
4181 <term><anchor id="MAXWINSTTL">max wins ttl (G)</term>
4182 <listitem><para>This option tells <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)
4183 </ulink> when acting as a WINS server (<link linkend="WINSSUPPORT">
4184 <parameter>wins support=yes</parameter></link>) what the maximum
4185 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <command>nmbd</command>
4186 will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this
4187 parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).</para>
4189 <para>See also the <link linkend="MINWINSTTL"><parameter>min
4190 wins ttl"</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
4192 <para>Default: <command>max wins ttl = 518400</command></para>
4193 </listitem>
4194 </varlistentry>
4198 <varlistentry>
4199 <term><anchor id="MAXXMIT">max xmit (G)</term>
4200 <listitem><para>This option controls the maximum packet size
4201 that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 65535, which
4202 is the maximum. In some cases you may find you get better performance
4203 with a smaller value. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems.
4204 </para>
4206 <para>Default: <command>max xmit = 65535</command></para>
4207 <para>Example: <command>max xmit = 8192</command></para>
4208 </listitem>
4209 </varlistentry>
4213 <varlistentry>
4214 <term><anchor id="MESSAGECOMMAND">message command (G)</term>
4215 <listitem><para>This specifies what command to run when the
4216 server receives a WinPopup style message.</para>
4218 <para>This would normally be a command that would
4219 deliver the message somehow. How this is to be done is
4220 up to your imagination.</para>
4222 <para>An example is:</para>
4224 <para><command>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &</command>
4225 </para>
4227 <para>This delivers the message using <command>xedit</command>, then
4228 removes it afterwards. <emphasis>NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT
4229 THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY</emphasis>. That's why I
4230 have the '&' on the end. If it doesn't return immediately then
4231 your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover
4232 after 30secs, hopefully).</para>
4234 <para>All messages are delivered as the global guest user.
4235 The command takes the standard substitutions, although <parameter>
4236 %u</parameter> won't work (<parameter>%U</parameter> may be better
4237 in this case).</para>
4239 <para>Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional
4240 ones apply. In particular:</para>
4242 <itemizedlist>
4243 <listitem><para><parameter>%s</parameter> = the filename containing
4244 the message.</para></listitem>
4246 <listitem><para><parameter>%t</parameter> = the destination that
4247 the message was sent to (probably the server name).</para></listitem>
4249 <listitem><para><parameter>%f</parameter> = who the message
4250 is from.</para></listitem>
4251 </itemizedlist>
4253 <para>You could make this command send mail, or whatever else
4254 takes your fancy. Please let us know of any really interesting
4255 ideas you have.</para>
4258 <para>Here's a way of sending the messages as mail to root:</para>
4260 <para><command>message command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on
4261 %m' root &lt; %s; rm %s</command></para>
4263 <para>If you don't have a message command then the message
4264 won't be delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was
4265 an error. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code
4266 and carries on regardless, saying that the message was delivered.
4267 </para>
4269 <para>If you want to silently delete it then try:</para>
4271 <para><command>message command = rm %s</command></para>
4273 <para>Default: <emphasis>no message command</emphasis></para>
4274 <para>Example: <command>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;
4275 rm %s' &</command></para>
4276 </listitem>
4277 </varlistentry>
4282 <varlistentry>
4283 <term><anchor id="MINPASSWDLENGTH">min passwd length (G)</term>
4284 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="MINPASSWORDLENGTH">
4285 <parameter>min password length</parameter></link>.</para>
4286 </listitem>
4287 </varlistentry>
4291 <varlistentry>
4292 <term><anchor id="MINPASSWORDLENGTH">min password length (G)</term>
4293 <listitem><para>This option sets the minimum length in characters
4294 of a plaintext password that <command>smbd</command> will accept when performing
4295 UNIX password changing.</para>
4297 <para>See also <link linkend="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"><parameter>unix
4298 password sync</parameter></link>, <link linkend="PASSWDPROGRAM">
4299 <parameter>passwd program</parameter></link> and <link
4300 linkend="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"><parameter>passwd chat debug</parameter>
4301 </link>.</para>
4303 <para>Default: <command>min password length = 5</command></para>
4304 </listitem>
4305 </varlistentry>
4309 <varlistentry>
4310 <term><anchor id="MINPRINTSPACE">min print space (S)</term>
4311 <listitem><para>This sets the minimum amount of free disk
4312 space that must be available before a user will be able to spool
4313 a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which
4314 means a user can always spool a print job.</para>
4316 <para>See also the <link linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing
4317 </parameter></link> parameter.</para>
4319 <para>Default: <command>min print space = 0</command></para>
4320 <para>Example: <command>min print space = 2000</command></para>
4321 </listitem>
4322 </varlistentry>
4327 <varlistentry>
4328 <term><anchor id="MINPROTOCOL">min protocol (G)</term>
4329 <listitem><para>The value of the parameter (a string) is the
4330 lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support. Please refer
4331 to the <link linkend="MAXPROTOCOL"><parameter>max protocol</parameter></link>
4332 parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description
4333 of each. You may also wish to refer to the C source code in
4334 <filename>source/smbd/negprot.c</filename> for a listing of known protocol
4335 dialects supported by clients.</para>
4337 <para>If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should
4338 also refer to the <link linkend="LANMANAUTH"><parameter>lanman
4339 auth</parameter></link> parameter. Otherwise, you should never need
4340 to change this parameter.</para>
4342 <para>Default : <command>min protocol = CORE</command></para>
4343 <para>Example : <command>min protocol = NT1</command> # disable DOS
4344 clients</para>
4345 </listitem>
4346 </varlistentry>
4351 <varlistentry>
4352 <term><anchor id="MINWINSTTL">min wins ttl (G)</term>
4353 <listitem><para>This option tells <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink>
4354 when acting as a WINS server (<link linkend="WINSSUPPORT"><parameter>
4355 wins support = yes</parameter></link>) what the minimum 'time to live'
4356 of NetBIOS names that <command>nmbd</command> will grant will be (in
4357 seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default
4358 is 6 hours (21600 seconds).</para>
4360 <para>Default: <command>min wins ttl = 21600</command></para>
4361 </listitem>
4362 </varlistentry>
4367 <varlistentry>
4368 <term><anchor id="MSDFSROOT">msdfs root (S)</term>
4369 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter is only available if
4370 Samba is configured and compiled with the <command>
4371 --with-msdfs</command> option. If set to <constant>yes></constant>,
4372 Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse
4373 the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory.
4374 Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic
4375 links of the form <filename>msdfs:serverA\shareA,serverB\shareB
4376 </filename> and so on. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree
4377 on Samba, refer to <ulink url="msdfs_setup.html">msdfs_setup.html
4378 </ulink>.</para>
4380 <para>See also <link linkend="HOSTMSDFS"><parameter>host msdfs
4381 </parameter></link></para>
4383 <para>Default: <command>msdfs root = no</command></para>
4384 </listitem>
4385 </varlistentry>
4388 <varlistentry>
4389 <term><anchor id="NAMERESOLVEORDER">name resolve order (G)</term>
4390 <listitem><para>This option is used by the programs in the Samba
4391 suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order
4392 to resolve host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space
4393 separated string of name resolution options.</para>
4395 <para>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They
4396 cause names to be resolved as follows :</para>
4398 <itemizedlist>
4399 <listitem><para><constant>lmhosts</constant> : Lookup an IP
4400 address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has
4401 no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the <ulink
4402 url="lmhosts.5.html">lmhosts(5)</ulink> for details) then
4403 any name type matches for lookup.</para></listitem>
4405 <listitem><para><constant>host</constant> : Do a standard host
4406 name to IP address resolution, using the system <filename>/etc/hosts
4407 </filename>, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution
4408 is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this
4409 may be controlled by the <filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename>
4410 file). Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name
4411 type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise
4412 it is ignored.</para></listitem>
4414 <listitem><para><constant>wins</constant> : Query a name with
4415 the IP address listed in the <link linkend="WINSSERVER"><parameter>
4416 wins server</parameter></link> parameter. If no WINS server has
4417 been specified this method will be ignored.</para></listitem>
4419 <listitem><para><constant>bcast</constant> : Do a broadcast on
4420 each of the known local interfaces listed in the <link
4421 linkend="INTERFACES"><parameter>interfaces</parameter></link>
4422 parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution
4423 methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally
4424 connected subnet.</para></listitem>
4425 </itemizedlist>
4427 <para>Default: <command>name resolve order = lmhosts host wins bcast
4428 </command></para>
4429 <para>Example: <command>name resolve order = lmhosts bcast host
4430 </command></para>
4432 <para>This will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined
4433 first, followed by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal
4434 system hostname lookup.</para>
4435 </listitem>
4436 </varlistentry>
4441 <varlistentry>
4442 <term><anchor id="NETBIOSALIASES">netbios aliases (G)</term>
4443 <listitem><para>This is a list of NetBIOS names that <ulink
4444 url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> will advertise as additional
4445 names by which the Samba server is known. This allows one machine
4446 to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If a machine is
4447 acting as a browse server or logon server none
4448 of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon
4449 servers, only the primary name of the machine will be advertised
4450 with these capabilities.</para>
4452 <para>See also <link linkend="NETBIOSNAME"><parameter>netbios
4453 name</parameter></link>.</para>
4455 <para>Default: <emphasis>empty string (no additional names)</emphasis></para>
4456 <para>Example: <command>netbios aliases = TEST TEST1 TEST2</command></para>
4457 </listitem>
4458 </varlistentry>
4462 <varlistentry>
4463 <term><anchor id="NETBIOSNAME">netbios name (G)</term>
4464 <listitem><para>This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba
4465 server is known. By default it is the same as the first component
4466 of the host's DNS name. If a machine is a browse server or
4467 logon server this name (or the first component
4468 of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are
4469 advertised under.</para>
4471 <para>See also <link linkend="NETBIOSALIASES"><parameter>netbios
4472 aliases</parameter></link>.</para>
4474 <para>Default: <emphasis>machine DNS name</emphasis></para>
4475 <para>Example: <command>netbios name = MYNAME</command></para>
4476 </listitem>
4477 </varlistentry>
4481 <varlistentry>
4482 <term><anchor id="NETBIOSSCOPE">netbios scope (G)</term>
4483 <listitem><para>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will
4484 operate under. This should not be set unless every machine
4485 on your LAN also sets this value.</para>
4486 </listitem>
4487 </varlistentry>
4490 <varlistentry>
4491 <term><anchor id="NISHOMEDIR">nis homedir (G)</term>
4492 <listitem><para>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For
4493 UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory
4494 will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote
4495 server. </para>
4497 <para>When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory
4498 server, but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two
4499 network hops would be required to access the users home directory
4500 if the logon server told the client to use itself as the SMB server
4501 for home directories (one over SMB and one over NFS). This can
4502 be very slow.</para>
4504 <para>This option allows Samba to return the home share as
4505 being on a different server to the logon server and as
4506 long as a Samba daemon is running on the home directory server,
4507 it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory
4508 server. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it
4509 will consult the NIS map specified in <link linkend="HOMEDIRMAP">
4510 <parameter>homedir map</parameter></link> and return the server
4511 listed there.</para>
4513 <para>Note that for this option to work there must be a working
4514 NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also
4515 be a logon server.</para>
4517 <para>Default: <command>nis homedir = no</command></para>
4518 </listitem>
4519 </varlistentry>
4523 <varlistentry>
4524 <term><anchor id="NTACLSUPPORT">nt acl support (G)</term>
4525 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether
4526 <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> will attempt to map
4527 UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists.</para>
4529 <para>Default: <command>nt acl support = yes</command></para>
4530 </listitem>
4531 </varlistentry>
4535 <varlistentry>
4536 <term><anchor id="NTPIPESUPPORT">nt pipe support (G)</term>
4537 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether
4538 <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> will allow Windows NT
4539 clients to connect to the NT SMB specific <constant>IPC$</constant>
4540 pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left
4541 alone.</para>
4543 <para>Default: <command>nt pipe support = yes</command></para>
4544 </listitem>
4545 </varlistentry>
4549 <varlistentry>
4550 <term><anchor id="NTSMBSUPPORT">nt smb support (G)</term>
4551 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether <ulink
4552 url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> will negotiate NT specific SMB
4553 support with Windows NT clients. Although this is a developer
4554 debugging option and should be left alone, benchmarking has discovered
4555 that Windows NT clients give faster performance with this option
4556 set to <constant>no</constant>. This is still being investigated.
4557 If this option is set to <constant>no</constant> then Samba offers
4558 exactly the same SMB calls that versions prior to Samba 2.0 offered.
4559 This information may be of use if any users are having problems
4560 with NT SMB support.</para>
4562 <para>You should not need to ever disable this parameter.</para>
4564 <para>Default: <command>nt smb support = yes</command></para>
4565 </listitem>
4566 </varlistentry>
4570 <varlistentry>
4571 <term><anchor id="NULLPASSWORDS">null passwords (G)</term>
4572 <listitem><para>Allow or disallow client access to accounts
4573 that have null passwords. </para>
4575 <para>See also <ulink url="smbpasswd.5.html">smbpasswd (5)</ulink>.</para>
4577 <para>Default: <command>null passwords = no</command></para>
4578 </listitem>
4579 </varlistentry>
4583 <varlistentry>
4584 <term><anchor id="ONLYUSER">only user (S)</term>
4585 <listitem><para>This is a boolean option that controls whether
4586 connections with usernames not in the <parameter>user</parameter>
4587 list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a
4588 client can supply a username to be used by the server. Enabling
4589 this parameter will force the server to only user the login
4590 names from the <parameter>user</parameter> list and is only really
4591 useful in <link linkend="SECURITYEQUALSSHARE">shave level</link>
4592 security.</para>
4594 <para>Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce
4595 usernames from the service name. This can be annoying for
4596 the [homes] section. To get around this you could use <command>user =
4597 %S</command> which means your <parameter>user</parameter> list
4598 will be just the service name, which for home directories is the
4599 name of the user.</para>
4601 <para>See also the <link linkend="USER"><parameter>user</parameter>
4602 </link> parameter.</para>
4604 <para>Default: <command>only user = no</command></para>
4605 </listitem>
4606 </varlistentry>
4612 <varlistentry>
4613 <term><anchor id="OLELOCKINGCOMPATIBILITY">ole locking compatibility (G)</term>
4614 <listitem><para>This parameter allows an administrator to turn
4615 off the byte range lock manipulation that is done within Samba to
4616 give compatibility for OLE applications. Windows OLE applications
4617 use byte range locking as a form of inter-process communication, by
4618 locking ranges of bytes around the 2^32 region of a file range. This
4619 can cause certain UNIX lock managers to crash or otherwise cause
4620 problems. Setting this parameter to <constant>no</constant> means you
4621 trust your UNIX lock manager to handle such cases correctly.</para>
4623 <para>Default: <command>ole locking compatibility = yes</command></para>
4624 </listitem>
4625 </varlistentry>
4629 <varlistentry>
4630 <term><anchor id="ONLYGUEST">only guest (S)</term>
4631 <listitem><para>A synonym for <link linkend="GUESTONLY"><parameter>
4632 guest only</parameter></link>.</para>
4633 </listitem>
4634 </varlistentry>
4638 <varlistentry>
4639 <term><anchor id="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME">oplock break wait time (G)</term>
4640 <listitem><para>This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in
4641 both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too
4642 quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock
4643 break request, then the network client can fail and not respond
4644 to the break request. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds)
4645 is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break
4646 request to such (broken) clients.</para>
4648 <para><emphasis>DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ
4649 AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</emphasis>.</para>
4651 <para>Default: <command>oplock break wait time = 0</command></para>
4652 </listitem>
4653 </varlistentry>
4656 <varlistentry>
4657 <term><anchor id="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT">oplock contention limit (S)</term>
4658 <listitem><para>This is a <emphasis>very</emphasis> advanced
4659 <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> tuning option to
4660 improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple
4661 client contention for the same file.</para>
4663 <para>In brief it specifies a number, which causes smbd not to
4664 grant an oplock even when requested if the approximate number of
4665 clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this
4666 limit. This causes <command>smbd</command> to behave in a similar
4667 way to Windows NT.</para>
4669 <para><emphasis>DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ
4670 AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</emphasis>.</para>
4672 <para>Default: <command>oplock contention limit = 2</command></para>
4673 </listitem>
4674 </varlistentry>
4680 <varlistentry>
4681 <term><anchor id="OPLOCKS">oplocks (S)</term>
4682 <listitem><para>This boolean option tells smbd whether to
4683 issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this
4684 share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve
4685 the speed of access to files on Samba servers. It allows the clients
4686 to aggressively cache files locally and you may want to disable this
4687 option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by
4688 default in Windows NT Servers). For more information see the file
4689 <filename>Speed.txt</filename> in the Samba <filename>docs/</filename>
4690 directory.</para>
4692 <para>Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a
4693 share. See the <link linkend="VETOOPLOCKFILES"><parameter>
4694 veto oplock files</parameter></link> parameter. On some systems
4695 oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system. This
4696 allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files,
4697 whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the
4698 <parameter>kernel oplocks</parameter> parameter for details.</para>
4700 <para>See also the <link linkend="KERNELOPLOCKS"><parameter>kernel
4701 oplocks</parameter></link> and <link linkend="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"><parameter>
4702 level2 oplocks</parameter></link> parameters.</para>
4704 <para>Default: <command>oplocks = yes</command></para>
4705 </listitem>
4706 </varlistentry>
4710 <varlistentry>
4711 <term><anchor id="OSLEVEL">os level (G)</term>
4712 <listitem><para>This integer value controls what level Samba
4713 advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this
4714 parameter determines whether <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink>
4715 has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the <parameter>
4716 WORKGROUP</parameter> in the local broadcast area.</para>
4718 <para><emphasis>Note :</emphasis>By default, Samba will win
4719 a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating
4720 systems except a Windows NT 4.0/2000 Domain Controller. This
4721 means that a misconfigured Samba host can effectively isolate
4722 a subnet for browsing purposes. See <filename>BROWSING.txt
4723 </filename> in the Samba <filename>docs/</filename> directory
4724 for details.</para>
4726 <para>Default: <command>os level = 20</command></para>
4727 <para>Example: <command>os level = 65 </command></para>
4728 </listitem>
4729 </varlistentry>
4733 <varlistentry>
4734 <term><anchor id="OS2DRIVERMAP">os2 driver map (G)</term>
4735 <listitem><para>The parameter is used to define the absolute
4736 path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver
4737 names to OS/2 printer driver names. The format is:</para>
4739 <para>&lt;nt driver name&gt; = &lt;os2 driver
4740 name&gt;.&lt;device name&gt;</para>
4742 <para>For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5
4743 printer driver woudl appear as <command>HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP
4744 LaserJet 5L</command>.</para>
4746 <para>The need for the file is due to the printer driver namespace
4747 problem described in the <ulink url="printer_driver2.html">Samba
4748 Printing HOWTO</ulink>. For more details on OS/2 clients, please
4749 refer to the <ulink url="OS2-Client-HOWTO.html">OS2-Client-HOWTO
4750 </ulink> containing in the Samba documentation.</para>
4752 <para>Default: <command>os2 driver map = &lt;empty string&gt;
4753 </command></para>
4754 </listitem>
4755 </varlistentry>
4759 <varlistentry>
4760 <term><anchor id="PANICACTION">panic action (G)</term>
4761 <listitem><para>This is a Samba developer option that allows a
4762 system command to be called when either <ulink url="smbd.8.html">
4763 smbd(8)</ulink> or <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink>
4764 crashes. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that
4765 a problem occurred.</para>
4767 <para>Default: <command>panic action = &lt;empty string&gt;</command></para>
4768 <para>Example: <command>panic action = "/bin/sleep 90000"</command></para>
4769 </listitem>
4770 </varlistentry>
4773 <varlistentry>
4774 <term><anchor id="PASSWDCHAT">passwd chat (G)</term>
4775 <listitem><para>This string controls the <emphasis>"chat"</emphasis>
4776 conversation that takes places between <ulink
4777 url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> and the local password changing
4778 program to change the users password. The string describes a
4779 sequence of response-receive pairs that <ulink url="smbd.8.html">
4780 smbd(8)</ulink> uses to determine what to send to the
4781 <link linkend="PASSWDPROGRAM"><parameter>passwd program</parameter>
4782 </link> and what to expect back. If the expected output is not
4783 received then the password is not changed.</para>
4785 <para>This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending
4786 on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS
4787 etc).</para>
4789 <para>The string can contain the macros <parameter>%o</parameter>
4790 and <parameter>%n</parameter> which are substituted for the old
4791 and new passwords respectively. It can also contain the standard
4792 macros <constant>\n</constant>, <constant>\r</constant>, <constant>
4793 \t</constant> and <constant>%s</constant> to give line-feed,
4794 carriage-return, tab and space.</para>
4796 <para>The string can also contain a '*' which matches
4797 any sequence of characters.</para>
4799 <para>Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces
4800 in them into a single string.</para>
4802 <para>If the send string in any part of the chat sequence
4803 is a fullstop ".", then no string is sent. Similarly,
4804 if the expect string is a fullstop then no string is expected.</para>
4806 <para>Note that if the <link linkend="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"><parameter>unix
4807 password sync</parameter></link> parameter is set to true, then this
4808 sequence is called <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis> when the SMB password
4809 in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old
4810 password cleartext. In this case the old password cleartext is set
4811 to "" (the empty string).</para>
4813 <para>See also <link linkend="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"><parameter>unix password
4814 sync</parameter></link>, <link linkend="PASSWDPROGRAM"><parameter>
4815 passwd program</parameter></link> and <link linkend="PASSWDCHATDEBUG">
4816 <parameter>passwd chat debug</parameter></link>.</para>
4818 <para>Default: <command>passwd chat = *new*password* %n\n
4819 *new*password* %n\n *changed*</command></para>
4820 <para>Example: <command>passwd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\n
4821 "*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password
4822 changed*"</command></para>
4823 </listitem>
4824 </varlistentry>
4828 <varlistentry>
4829 <term><anchor id="PASSWDCHATDEBUG">passwd chat debug (G)</term>
4830 <listitem><para>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script
4831 parameter is run in <emphasis>debug</emphasis> mode. In this mode the
4832 strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed
4833 in the <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> log with a
4834 <link linkend="DEBUGLEVEL"><parameter>debug level</parameter></link>
4835 of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords
4836 to be seen in the <command>smbd</command> log. It is available to help
4837 Samba admins debug their <parameter>passwd chat</parameter> scripts
4838 when calling the <parameter>passwd program</parameter> and should
4839 be turned off after this has been done. This parameter is off by
4840 default.</para>
4842 <para>See also <<link linkend="PASSWDCHAT"><parameter>passwd chat</parameter>
4843 </link>, <link linkend="PASSWDPROGRAM"><parameter>passwd program</parameter>
4844 </link>.</para>
4846 <para>Default: <command>passwd chat debug = no</command></para>
4847 </listitem>
4848 </varlistentry>
4852 <varlistentry>
4853 <term><anchor id="PASSWDPROGRAM">passwd program (G)</term>
4854 <listitem><para>The name of a program that can be used to set
4855 UNIX user passwords. Any occurrences of <parameter>%u</parameter>
4856 will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for
4857 existence before calling the password changing program.</para>
4859 <para>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <emphasis>reasonable
4860 </emphasis> passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion
4861 of mixed case chars and digits. This can pose a problem as some clients
4862 (such as Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending
4863 it.</para>
4865 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that if the <parameter>unix
4866 password sync</parameter> parameter is set to <constant>True
4867 </constant> then this program is called <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis>
4868 before the SMB password in the <ulink url="smbpasswd.5.html">smbpasswd(5)
4869 </ulink> file is changed. If this UNIX password change fails, then
4870 <command>smbd</command> will fail to change the SMB password also
4871 (this is by design).</para>
4873 <para>If the <parameter>unix password sync</parameter> parameter
4874 is set this parameter <emphasis>MUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS</emphasis>
4875 for <emphasis>ALL</emphasis> programs called, and must be examined
4876 for security implications. Note that by default <parameter>unix
4877 password sync</parameter> is set to <constant>False</constant>.</para>
4879 <para>See also <link linkend="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"><parameter>unix
4880 password sync</parameter></link>.</para>
4882 <para>Default: <command>passwd program = /bin/passwd</command></para>
4883 <para>Example: <command>passwd program = /sbin/npasswd %u</command>
4884 </para>
4885 </listitem>
4886 </varlistentry>
4890 <varlistentry>
4891 <term><anchor id="PASSWORDLEVEL">password level (G)</term>
4892 <listitem><para>Some client/server combinations have difficulty
4893 with mixed-case passwords. One offending client is Windows for
4894 Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper
4895 case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when
4896 using COREPLUS! Another problem child is the Windows 95/98
4897 family of operating systems. These clients upper case clear
4898 text passwords even when NT LM 0.12 selected by the protocol
4899 negotiation request/response.</para>
4901 <para>This parameter defines the maximum number of characters
4902 that may be upper case in passwords.</para>
4904 <para>For example, say the password given was "FRED". If <parameter>
4905 password level</parameter> is set to 1, the following combinations
4906 would be tried if "FRED" failed:</para>
4908 <para>"Fred", "fred", "fRed", "frEd","freD"</para>
4910 <para>If <parameter>password level</parameter> was set to 2,
4911 the following combinations would also be tried: </para>
4913 <para>"FRed", "FrEd", "FreD", "fREd", "fReD", "frED", ..</para>
4915 <para>And so on.</para>
4917 <para>The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely
4918 it is that a mixed case password will be matched against a single
4919 case password. However, you should be aware that use of this
4920 parameter reduces security and increases the time taken to
4921 process a new connection.</para>
4923 <para>A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be
4924 made - the password as is and the password in all-lower case.</para>
4926 <para>Default: <command>password level = 0</command></para>
4927 <para>Example: <command>password level = 4</command</para>
4928 </listitem>
4929 </varlistentry>
4933 <varlistentry>
4934 <term><anchor id="PASSWORDSERVER">password server (G)</term>
4935 <listitem><para>By specifying the name of another SMB server (such
4936 as a WinNT box) with this option, and using <command>security = domain
4937 </command> or <command>security = server</command> you can get Samba
4938 to do all its username/password validation via a remote server.</para>
4940 <para>This option sets the name of the password server to use.
4941 It must be a NetBIOS name, so if the machine's NetBIOS name is
4942 different from its Internet name then you may have to add its NetBIOS
4943 name to the lmhosts file which is stored in the same directory
4944 as the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file.</para>
4946 <para>The name of the password server is looked up using the
4947 parameter <link linkend="NAMERESOLVEORDER"><parameter>name
4948 resolve order</parameter></link> and so may resolved
4949 by any method and order described in that parameter.</para>
4951 <para>The password server much be a machine capable of using
4952 the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in
4953 user level security mode.</para>
4955 <para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> Using a password server
4956 means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your
4957 password server. <emphasis>DO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT
4958 YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</emphasis>.</para>
4960 <para>Never point a Samba server at itself for password
4961 serving. This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba
4962 server!</para>
4964 <para>The name of the password server takes the standard
4965 substitutions, but probably the only useful one is <parameter>%m
4966 </parameter>, which means the Samba server will use the incoming
4967 client as the password server. If you use this then you better
4968 trust your clients, and you had better restrict them with hosts allow!</para>
4970 <para>If the <parameter>security</parameter> parameter is set to
4971 <constant>domain</constant>, then the list of machines in this
4972 option must be a list of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the
4973 Domain or the character '*', as the Samba server is effectively
4974 in that domain, and will use cryptographically authenticated RPC calls
4975 to authenticate the user logging on. The advantage of using <command>
4976 security = domain</command> is that if you list several hosts in the
4977 <parameter>password server</parameter> option then <command>smbd
4978 </command> will try each in turn till it finds one that responds. This
4979 is useful in case your primary server goes down.</para>
4981 <para>If the <parameter>password server</parameter> option is set
4982 to the character '*', then Samba will attempt to auto-locate the
4983 Primary or Backup Domain controllers to authenticate against by
4984 doing a query for the name <constant>WORKGROUP&lt;1C&gt;</constant>
4985 and then contacting each server returned in the list of IP
4986 addresses from the name resolution source. </para>
4988 <para>If the <parameter>security</parameter> parameter is
4989 set to <constant>server</constant>, then there are different
4990 restrictions that <command>security = domain</command> doesn't
4991 suffer from:</para>
4993 <itemizedlist>
4994 <listitem><para>You may list several password servers in
4995 the <parameter>password server</parameter> parameter, however if an
4996 <command>smbd</command> makes a connection to a password server,
4997 and then the password server fails, no more users will be able
4998 to be authenticated from this <command>smbd</command>. This is a
4999 restriction of the SMB/CIFS protocol when in <command>security=server
5000 </command> mode and cannot be fixed in Samba.</para></listitem>
5002 <listitem><para>If you are using a Windows NT server as your
5003 password server then you will have to ensure that your users
5004 are able to login from the Samba server, as when in <command>
5005 security=server</command> mode the network logon will appear to
5006 come from there rather than from the users workstation.</para></listitem>
5007 </itemizedlist>
5009 <para>See also the <link linkend="SECURITY"><parameter>security
5010 </parameter></link> parameter.</para>
5012 <para>Default: <command>password server = &lt;empty string&gt;</command>
5013 </para>
5014 <para>Example: <command>password server = NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2
5015 </command></para>
5016 <para>Example: <command>password server = *</command></para>
5017 </listitem>
5018 </varlistentry>
5022 <varlistentry>
5023 <term><anchor id="PATH">path (S)</term>
5024 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies a directory to which
5025 the user of the service is to be given access. In the case of
5026 printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to
5027 being submitted to the host for printing.</para>
5029 <para>For a printable service offering guest access, the service
5030 should be readonly and the path should be world-writeable and
5031 have the sticky bit set. This is not mandatory of course, but
5032 you probably won't get the results you expect if you do
5033 otherwise.</para>
5035 <para>Any occurrences of <parameter>%u</parameter> in the path
5036 will be replaced with the UNIX username that the client is using
5037 on this connection. Any occurrences of <parameter>%m</parameter>
5038 will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are
5039 connecting from. These replacements are very useful for setting
5040 up pseudo home directories for users.</para>
5042 <para>Note that this path will be based on <link linkend="ROOTDIR">
5043 <parameter>root dir</parameter></link> if one was specified.</para>
5045 <para>Default: <emphasis>none</emphasis></para>
5046 <para>Example: <command>path = /home/fred</command></para>
5047 </listitem>
5048 </varlistentry>
5053 <varlistentry>
5054 <term><anchor id="POSIXLOCKING">posix locking (S)</term>
5055 <listitem><para>The <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>
5056 daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients.
5057 The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX
5058 locks. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are
5059 consistent with those seen by POSIX compliant applications accessing
5060 the files via a non-SMB method (e.g. NFS or local file access).
5061 You should never need to disable this parameter.</para>
5063 <para>Default: <command>posix locking = yes</command></para>
5064 </listitem>
5065 </varlistentry>
5070 <varlistentry>
5071 <term><anchor id="POSTEXEC">postexec (S)</term>
5072 <listitem><para>This option specifies a command to be run
5073 whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual
5074 substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some
5075 systems.</para>
5077 <para>An interesting example may be do unmount server
5078 resources:</para>
5080 <para><command>postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom</command></para>
5082 <para>See also <link linkend="PREEXEC"><parameter>preexec</parameter>
5083 </link>.</para>
5085 <para>Default: <emphasis>none (no command executed)</emphasis>
5086 </para>
5088 <para>Example: <command>postexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S
5089 from %m (%I)\" &gt;&gt; /tmp/log</command></para>
5090 </listitem>
5091 </varlistentry>
5095 <varlistentry>
5096 <term><anchor id="POSTSCRIPT">postscript (S)</term>
5097 <listitem><para>This parameter forces a printer to interpret
5098 the print files as postscript. This is done by adding a <constant>%!
5099 </constant> to the start of print output.</para>
5101 <para>This is most useful when you have lots of PCs that persist
5102 in putting a control-D at the start of print jobs, which then
5103 confuses your printer.</para>
5105 <para>Default: <command>postscript = no</command></para>
5106 </listitem>
5107 </varlistentry>
5111 <varlistentry>
5112 <term><anchor id="PREEXEC">preexec (S)</term>
5113 <listitem><para>This option specifies a command to be run whenever
5114 the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.</para>
5116 <para>An interesting example is to send the users a welcome
5117 message every time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here
5118 is an example:</para>
5120 <para><command>preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" |
5121 /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' & </command></para>
5123 <para>Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)</para>
5125 <para>See also <link linkend="PREEXECCLOSE"><parameter>preexec close
5126 </parameter</link> and <link linkend="POSTEXEC"><parameter>postexec
5127 </parameter></link>.</para>
5129 <para>Default: <emphasis>none (no command executed)</emphasis></para>
5130 <para>Example: <command>preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m
5131 (%I)\" &gt;&gt; /tmp/log</command></para>
5132 </listitem>
5133 </varlistentry>
5137 <varlistentry>
5138 <term><anchor id="PREEXECCLOSE">preexec close (S)</term>
5139 <listitem><para>This boolean option controls whether a non-zero
5140 return code from <link linkend="PREEXEC"><parameter>preexec
5141 </parameter></link> should close the service being connected to.</para>
5143 <para>Default: <command>preexec close = no</command></para>
5144 </listitem>
5145 </varlistentry>
5148 <varlistentry>
5149 <term><anchor id="PREFERREDMASTER">preferred master (G)</term>
5150 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls if <ulink
5151 url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> is a preferred master browser
5152 for its workgroup.</para>
5154 <para>If this is set to true, on startup, <command>nmbd</command>
5155 will force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in
5156 winning the election. It is recommended that this parameter is
5157 used in conjunction with <command><link linkend="DOMAINMASTER"><parameter>
5158 domain master</parameter></link> = yes</command>, so that <command>
5159 nmbd</command> can guarantee becoming a domain master.</para>
5161 <para>Use this option with caution, because if there are several
5162 hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred
5163 master browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically
5164 and continuously attempt to become the local master browser.
5165 This will result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing
5166 capabilities.</para>
5168 <para>See also <link linkend="OSLEVEL"><parameter>os level</parameter>
5169 </link>.</para>
5171 <para>Default: <command>preferred master = auto</command></para>
5172 </listitem>
5173 </varlistentry>
5177 <varlistentry>
5178 <term><anchor id="PREFEREDMASTER">prefered master (G)</term>
5179 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="PREFERREDMASTER"><parameter>
5180 preferred master</parameter></link> for people who cannot spell :-).</para>
5181 </listitem>
5182 </varlistentry>
5186 <varlistentry>
5187 <term><anchor id="PRELOAD">preload</term>
5188 <listitem><para>This is a list of services that you want to be
5189 automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful
5190 for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be
5191 visible.</para>
5193 <para>Note that if you just want all printers in your
5194 printcap file loaded then the <link linkend="LOADPRINTERS">
5195 <parameter>load printers</parameter></link> option is easier.</para>
5197 <para>Default: <emphasis>no preloaded services</emphasis></para>
5199 <para>Example: <command>preload = fred lp colorlp</command></para>
5200 </listitem>
5201 </varlistentry>
5204 <varlistentry>
5205 <term><anchor id="PRESERVECASE">preserve case (S)</term>
5206 <listitem><para> This controls if new filenames are created
5207 with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to
5208 be the <link linkend="DEFAULTCASE"><parameter>default case
5209 </parameter></link>.</para>
5211 <para>Default: <command>preserve case = yes</command></para>
5213 <para>See the section on <link linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT">NAME
5214 MANGLING</link> for a fuller discussion.</para>
5215 </listitem>
5216 </varlistentry>
5220 <varlistentry>
5221 <term><anchor id="PRINTCOMMAND">print command (S)</term>
5222 <listitem><para>After a print job has finished spooling to
5223 a service, this command will be used via a <command>system()</command>
5224 call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will
5225 submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there
5226 is no requirement that this be the case. The server will not remove
5227 the spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the
5228 spool file when it has been processed, otherwise you will need to
5229 manually remove old spool files.</para>
5231 <para>The print command is simply a text string. It will be used
5232 verbatim, with two exceptions: All occurrences of <parameter>%s
5233 </parameter> and <parameter>%f</parameter> will be replaced by the
5234 appropriate spool file name, and all occurrences of <parameter>%p
5235 </parameter> will be replaced by the appropriate printer name. The
5236 spool file name is generated automatically by the server, the printer
5237 name is discussed below.</para>
5239 <para>The print command <emphasis>MUST</emphasis> contain at least
5240 one occurrence of <parameter>%s</parameter> or <parameter>%f
5241 </parameter> - the <parameter>%p</parameter> is optional. At the time
5242 a job is submitted, if no printer name is supplied the <parameter>%p
5243 </parameter> will be silently removed from the printer command.</para>
5245 <para>If specified in the [global] section, the print command given
5246 will be used for any printable service that does not have its own
5247 print command specified.</para>
5249 <para>If there is neither a specified print command for a
5250 printable service nor a global print command, spool files will
5251 be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed.</para>
5253 <para>Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the
5254 <constant>nobody</constant> account. If this happens then create
5255 an alternative guest account that can print and set the <link
5256 linkend="GUESTACCOUNT"><parameter>guest account</parameter></link>
5257 in the [global] section.</para>
5259 <para>You can form quite complex print commands by realizing
5260 that they are just passed to a shell. For example the following
5261 will log a print job, print the file, then remove it. Note that
5262 ';' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts.</para>
5264 <para><command>print command = echo Printing %s &gt;&gt;
5265 /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s</command></para>
5267 <para>You may have to vary this command considerably depending
5268 on how you normally print files on your system. The default for
5269 the parameter varies depending on the setting of the <link linkend="PRINTING">
5270 <parameter>printing</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
5272 <para>Default: For <command>printing= BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG
5273 or PLP :</command></para>
5274 <para><command>print command = lpr -r -P%p %s</command></para>
5276 <para>For <command>printing= SYS or HPUX :</command></para>
5277 <para><command>print command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s</command></para>
5279 <para>For <command>printing=SOFTQ :</command></para>
5280 <para><command>print command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s</command></para>
5282 <para>Example: <command>print command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript
5283 %p %s</command></para>
5284 </listitem>
5285 </varlistentry>
5289 <varlistentry>
5290 <term><anchor id="PRINTOK">print ok (S)</term>
5291 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="PRINTABLE">
5292 <parameter>printable</parameter></link>.</para>
5293 </listitem>
5294 </varlistentry>
5299 <varlistentry>
5300 <term><anchor id="PRINTABLE">printable (S)</term>
5301 <listitem><para>If this parameter is <constant>yes</constant>, then
5302 clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory
5303 specified for the service. </para>
5305 <para>Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing
5306 to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling
5307 of print data. The <link linkend="WRITEABLE"><parameter>writeable
5308 </parameter></link> parameter controls only non-printing access to
5309 the resource.</para>
5311 <para>Default: <command>printable = no</command></para>
5312 </listitem>
5313 </varlistentry>
5317 <varlistentry>
5318 <term><anchor id="PRINTCAP">printcap (G)</term>
5319 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="PRINTCAPNAME"><parameter>
5320 printcap name</parameter></link>.</para>
5321 </listitem>
5322 </varlistentry>
5327 <varlistentry>
5328 <term><anchor id="PRINTCAPNAME">printcap name (G)</term>
5329 <listitem><para>This parameter may be used to override the
5330 compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually <filename>
5331 /etc/printcap</filename>). See the discussion of the <link
5332 linkend="PRINTERSSECT">[printers]</link> section above for reasons
5333 why you might want to do this.</para>
5335 <para>On System V systems that use <command>lpstat</command> to
5336 list available printers you can use <command>printcap name = lpstat
5337 </command> to automatically obtain lists of available printers. This
5338 is the default for systems that define SYSV at configure time in
5339 Samba (this includes most System V based systems). If <parameter>
5340 printcap name</parameter> is set to <command>lpstat</command> on
5341 these systems then Samba will launch <command>lpstat -v</command> and
5342 attempt to parse the output to obtain a printer list.</para>
5344 <para>A minimal printcap file would look something like this:</para>
5346 <para><programlisting>
5347 print1|My Printer 1
5348 print2|My Printer 2
5349 print3|My Printer 3
5350 print4|My Printer 4
5351 print5|My Printer 5
5352 </programlisting></para>
5354 <para>where the '|' separates aliases of a printer. The fact
5355 that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba
5356 that it's a comment.</para>
5358 <para><emphasis>NOTE</emphasis>: Under AIX the default printcap
5359 name is <filename>/etc/qconfig</filename>. Samba will assume the
5360 file is in AIX <filename>qconfig</filename> format if the string
5361 <filename>qconfig</filename> appears in the printcap filename.</para>
5363 <para>Default: <command>printcap name = /etc/printcap</command></para>
5364 <para>Example: <command>printcap name = /etc/myprintcap</command></para>
5365 </listitem>
5366 </varlistentry>
5372 <varlistentry>
5373 <term><anchor id="PRINTERADMIN">printer admin (S)</term>
5374 <listitem><para>This is a list of users that can do anything to
5375 printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC
5376 (usually using a NT workstation). Note that the root user always
5377 has admin rights.</para>
5379 <para>Default: <command>printer admin = &lt;empty string&gt;</command>
5380 </para>
5381 <para>Example: <command>printer admin = admin, @staff</command></para>
5382 </listitem>
5383 </varlistentry>
5389 <varlistentry>
5390 <term><anchor id="PRINTERDRIVER">printer driver (S)</term>
5391 <listitem><para><emphasis>Note :</emphasis>This is a depreciated
5392 parameter and will be removed in the next major release
5393 following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
5394 <filename>PRINTER_DRIVER2.txt</filename> in the <filename>docs
5395 </filename> of the Samba distribution for more information
5396 on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
5397 </para>
5399 <para>This option allows you to control the string
5400 that clients receive when they ask the server for the printer driver
5401 associated with a printer. If you are using Windows95 or Windows NT
5402 then you can use this to automate the setup of printers on your
5403 system.</para>
5405 <para>You need to set this parameter to the exact string (case
5406 sensitive) that describes the appropriate printer driver for your
5407 system. If you don't know the exact string to use then you should
5408 first try with no <link linkend="PRINTERDRIVER"><parameter>
5409 printer driver</parameter></link> option set and the client will
5410 give you a list of printer drivers. The appropriate strings are
5411 shown in a scroll box after you have chosen the printer manufacturer.</para>
5413 <para>See also <link linkend="PRINTERDRIVERFILE"><parameter>printer
5414 driver file</parameter></link>.</para>
5416 <para>Example: <command>printer driver = HP LaserJet 4L</command></para>
5417 </listitem>
5418 </varlistentry>
5422 <varlistentry>
5423 <term><anchor id="PRINTERDRIVERFILE">printer driver file (G)</term>
5424 <listitem><para><emphasis>Note :</emphasis>This is a depreciated
5425 parameter and will be removed in the next major release
5426 following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
5427 <filename>PRINTER_DRIVER2.txt</filename> in the <filename>docs
5428 </filename> of the Samba distribution for more information
5429 on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
5430 </para>
5432 <para>This parameter tells Samba where the printer driver
5433 definition file, used when serving drivers to Windows 95 clients, is
5434 to be found. If this is not set, the default is :</para>
5436 <para><filename><replaceable>SAMBA_INSTALL_DIRECTORY</replaceable>
5437 /lib/printers.def</filename></para>
5439 <para>This file is created from Windows 95 <filename>msprint.inf
5440 </filename> files found on the Windows 95 client system. For more
5441 details on setting up serving of printer drivers to Windows 95
5442 clients, see the documentation file in the <filename>docs/</filename>
5443 directory, <filename>PRINTER_DRIVER.txt</filename>.</para>
5445 <para>See also <link linkend="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION"><parameter>
5446 printer driver location</parameter></link>.</para>
5448 <para>Default: <emphasis>None (set in compile).</emphasis></para>
5450 <para>Example: <command>printer driver file =
5451 /usr/local/samba/printers/drivers.def</command></para>
5452 </listitem>
5453 </varlistentry>
5458 <varlistentry>
5459 <term><anchor id="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION">printer driver location (S)</term>
5460 <listitem><para><emphasis>Note :</emphasis>This is a depreciated
5461 parameter and will be removed in the next major release
5462 following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
5463 <filename>PRINTER_DRIVER2.txt</filename> in the <filename>docs
5464 </filename> of the Samba distribution for more information
5465 on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
5466 </para>
5468 <para>This parameter tells clients of a particular printer
5469 share where to find the printer driver files for the automatic
5470 installation of drivers for Windows 95 machines. If Samba is set up
5471 to serve printer drivers to Windows 95 machines, this should be set to</para>
5473 <para><command>\\MACHINE\PRINTER$</command></para>
5475 <para>Where MACHINE is the NetBIOS name of your Samba server,
5476 and PRINTER$ is a share you set up for serving printer driver
5477 files. For more details on setting this up see the documentation
5478 file in the <filename>docs/</filename> directory, <filename>
5479 PRINTER_DRIVER.txt</filename>.</para>
5481 <para>See also <link linkend="PRINTERDRIVERFILE"><parameter>
5482 printer driver file</parameter></link>.</para>
5484 <para>Default: <command>none</command></para>
5485 <para>Example: <command>printer driver location = \\MACHINE\PRINTER$
5486 </command></para>
5487 </listitem>
5488 </varlistentry>
5492 <varlistentry>
5493 <term><anchor id="PRINTERNAME">printer name (S)</term>
5494 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the name of the printer
5495 to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.</para>
5497 <para>If specified in the [global] section, the printer
5498 name given will be used for any printable service that does
5499 not have its own printer name specified.</para>
5501 <para>Default: <emphasis>none (but may be <constant>lp</constant>
5502 on many systems)</emphasis></para>
5504 <para>Example: <command>printer name = laserwriter</command></para>
5505 </listitem>
5506 </varlistentry>
5509 <varlistentry>
5510 <term><anchor id="PRINTER">printer (S)</term>
5511 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="PRINTERNAME"><parameter>
5512 printer name</parameter></link>.</para>
5513 </listitem>
5514 </varlistentry>
5518 <varlistentry>
5519 <term><anchor id="PRINTING">printing (S)</term>
5520 <listitem><para>This parameters controls how printer status
5521 information is interpreted on your system. It also affects the
5522 default values for the <parameter>print command</parameter>,
5523 <parameter>lpq command</parameter>, <parameter>lppause command
5524 </parameter>, <parameter>lpresume command</parameter>, and
5525 <parameter>lprm command</parameter> if specified in the
5526 [global]f> section.</para>
5528 <para>Currently eight printing styles are supported. They are
5529 <constant>BSD</constant>, <constant>AIX</constant>,
5530 <constant>LPRNG</constant>, <constant>PLP</constant>,
5531 <constant>SYSV</constant>, <constant>HPUX</constant>,
5532 <constant>QNX</constant>, <constant>SOFTQ</constant>,
5533 and <constant>CUPS</constant>.</para>
5535 <para>To see what the defaults are for the other print
5536 commands when using the various options use the <ulink
5537 url="testparm.1.html">testparm(1)</ulink> program.</para>
5539 <para>This option can be set on a per printer basis</para>
5541 <para>See also the discussion in the <link linkend="PRINTERSSECT">
5542 [printers]</link> section.</para>
5543 </listitem>
5544 </varlistentry>
5549 <varlistentry>
5550 <term><anchor id="PROTOCOL">protocol (G)</term>
5551 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="MAXPROTOCOL">
5552 <parameter>max protocol</parameter></link>.</para></listitem>
5553 </varlistentry>
5558 <varlistentry>
5559 <term><anchor id="PUBLIC">public (S)</term>
5560 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="GUESTOK"><parameter>guest
5561 ok</parameter></link>.</para>
5562 </listitem>
5563 </varlistentry>
5567 <varlistentry>
5568 <term><anchor id="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND">queuepause command (S)</term>
5569 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be
5570 executed on the server host in order to pause the printerqueue.</para>
5572 <para>This command should be a program or script which takes
5573 a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printerqueue,
5574 such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.</para>
5576 <para>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups,
5577 but can be issued from the Printer's window under Windows 95
5578 and NT.</para>
5580 <para>If a <parameter>%p</parameter> is given then the printername
5581 is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.
5582 </para>
5584 <para>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute
5585 path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the
5586 server.</para>
5588 <para>Default: <emphasis>depends on the setting of <parameter>printing
5589 </parameter></emphasis></para>
5590 <para>Example: <command>queuepause command = disable %p</command></para>
5591 </listitem>
5592 </varlistentry>
5596 <varlistentry>
5597 <term><anchor id="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND">queueresume command (S)</term>
5598 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be
5599 executed on the server host in order to resume the printerqueue. It
5600 is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the
5601 previous parameter (<link linkend="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"><parameter>
5602 queuepause command</parameter></link>).</para>
5604 <para>This command should be a program or script which takes
5605 a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printerqueue,
5606 such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer.</para>
5608 <para>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups,
5609 but can be issued from the Printer's window under Windows 95
5610 and NT.</para>
5612 <para>If a <parameter>%p</parameter> is given then the printername
5613 is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the
5614 command.</para>
5616 <para>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute
5617 path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the
5618 server.</para>
5620 <para>Default: <emphasis>depends on the setting of <link
5621 linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing</parameter></link></emphasis>
5622 </para>
5624 <para>Example: <command>queuepause command = enable %p
5625 </command></para>
5626 </listitem>
5627 </varlistentry>
5631 <varlistentry>
5632 <term><anchor id="READBMPX">read bmpx (G)</term>
5633 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether <ulink
5634 url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> will support the "Read
5635 Block Multiplex" SMB. This is now rarely used and defaults to
5636 <constant>no</constant>. You should never need to set this
5637 parameter.</para>
5639 <para>Default: <command>read bmpx = no</command></para>
5640 </listitem>
5641 </varlistentry>
5646 <varlistentry>
5647 <term><anchor id="READLIST">read list (S)</term>
5648 <listitem><para>This is a list of users that are given read-only
5649 access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then
5650 they will not be given write access, no matter what the <link
5651 linkend="WRITEABLE"><parameter>writeable</parameter></link>
5652 option is set to. The list can include group names using the
5653 syntax described in the <link linkend="INVALIDUSERS"><parameter>
5654 invalid users</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
5656 <para>See also the <link linkend="WRITELIST"><parameter>
5657 write list</parameter></link> parameter and the <link
5658 linkend="INVALIDUSERS"><parameter>invalid users</parameter>
5659 </link> parameter.</para>
5661 <para>Default: <command>read list = &lt;empty string&gt;</command></para>
5662 <para>Example: <command>read list = mary, @students</command></para>
5663 </listitem>
5664 </varlistentry>
5668 <varlistentry>
5669 <term><anchor id="READONLY">read only (S)</term>
5670 <listitem><para>Note that this is an inverted synonym for <link
5671 linkend="WRITEABLE"><parameter>writeable</parameter></link>.</para>
5672 </listitem>
5673 </varlistentry>
5677 <varlistentry>
5678 <term><anchor id="READRAW">read raw (G)</term>
5679 <listitem><para>This parameter controls whether or not the server
5680 will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data
5681 to clients.</para>
5683 <para>If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in
5684 one packet. This typically provides a major performance benefit.
5685 </para>
5687 <para>However, some clients either negotiate the allowable
5688 block size incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block
5689 sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads.</para>
5691 <para>In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning
5692 tool and left severely alone. See also <link linkend="WRITERAW">
5693 <parameter>write raw</parameter></link>.</para>
5695 <para>Default: <command>read raw = yes</command></para>
5696 </listitem>
5697 </varlistentry>
5700 <varlistentry>
5701 <term><anchor id="READSIZE">read size (G)</term>
5702 <listitem><para>The option <parameter>read size</parameter>
5703 affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with network reads/writes.
5704 If the amount of data being transferred in several of the SMB
5705 commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and SMBreadbraw) is larger
5706 than this value then the server begins writing the data before it
5707 has received the whole packet from the network, or in the case of
5708 SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before all the data
5709 has been read from disk.</para>
5711 <para>This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and
5712 network access are similar, having very little effect when the
5713 speed of one is much greater than the other.</para>
5715 <para>The default value is 16384, but very little experimentation
5716 has been done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely
5717 that the best value will vary greatly between systems anyway.
5718 A value over 65536 is pointless and will cause you to allocate
5719 memory unnecessarily.</para>
5721 <para>Default: <command>read size = 16384</command></para>
5722 <para>Example: <command>read size = 8192</command></para>
5723 </listitem>
5724 </varlistentry>
5728 <varlistentry>
5729 <term><anchor id="REMOTEANNOUNCE">remote announce (G)</term>
5730 <listitem><para>This option allows you to setup <ulink
5731 url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> to periodically announce itself
5732 to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name.</para>
5734 <para>This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear
5735 in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation
5736 rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you
5737 can send IP packets to.</para>
5739 <para>For example:</para>
5741 <para><command>remote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS
5742 192.168.4.255/STAFF</command></para>
5744 <para>the above line would cause nmbd to announce itself
5745 to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names.
5746 If you leave out the workgroup name then the one given in
5747 the <link linkend="WORKGROUP"><parameter>workgroup</parameter></link>
5748 parameter is used instead.</para>
5750 <para>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast
5751 addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses
5752 of known browse masters if your network config is that stable.</para>
5754 <para>See the documentation file <filename>BROWSING.txt</filename>
5755 in the <filename>docs/</filename> directory.</para>
5757 <para>Default: <command>remote announce = &lt;empty string&gt;
5758 </command></para>
5759 </listitem>
5760 </varlistentry>
5764 <varlistentry>
5765 <term><anchor id="REMOTEBROWSESYNC">remote browse sync (G)</term>
5766 <listitem><para>This option allows you to setup <ulink
5767 url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> to periodically request
5768 synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a samba
5769 server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to
5770 gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks. This
5771 is done in a manner that does not work with any non-samba servers.</para>
5773 <para>This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local
5774 clients to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse
5775 propagation rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere
5776 that you can send IP packets to.</para>
5778 <para>For example:</para>
5780 <para><command>remote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255
5781 </command></para>
5783 <para>the above line would cause <command>nmbd</command> to request
5784 the master browser on the specified subnets or addresses to
5785 synchronize their browse lists with the local server.</para>
5787 <para>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast
5788 addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses
5789 of known browse masters if your network config is that stable. If
5790 a machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate
5791 that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it
5792 is in fact the browse master on it's segment.</para>
5794 <para>Default: <command>remote browse sync = &lt;empty string&gt;
5795 </command></para>
5796 </listitem>
5797 </varlistentry>
5801 <varlistentry>
5802 <term><anchor id="RESTRICTANONYMOUS">restrict anonymous (G)</term>
5803 <listitem><para>This is a boolean parameter. If it is true, then
5804 anonymous access to the server will be restricted, namely in the
5805 case where the server is expecting the client to send a username,
5806 but it doesn't. Setting it to true will force these anonymous
5807 connections to be denied, and the client will be required to always
5808 supply a username and password when connecting. Use of this parameter
5809 is only recommended for homogeneous NT client environments.</para>
5811 <para>This parameter makes the use of macro expansions that rely
5812 on the username (%U, %G, etc) consistent. NT 4.0
5813 likes to use anonymous connections when refreshing the share list,
5814 and this is a way to work around that.</para>
5816 <para>When restrict anonymous is true, all anonymous connections
5817 are denied no matter what they are for. This can effect the ability
5818 of a machine to access the samba Primary Domain Controller to revalidate
5819 it's machine account after someone else has logged on the client
5820 interactively. The NT client will display a message saying that
5821 the machine's account in the domain doesn't exist or the password is
5822 bad. The best way to deal with this is to reboot NT client machines
5823 between interactive logons, using "Shutdown and Restart", rather
5824 than "Close all programs and logon as a different user".</para>
5826 <para>Default: <command>restrict anonymous = no</command></para>
5827 </listitem>
5828 </varlistentry>
5832 <varlistentry>
5833 <term><anchor id="ROOT">root (G)</term>
5834 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="ROOTDIRECTORY">
5835 <parameter>root directory"</parameter></link>.</para>
5836 </listitem>
5837 </varlistentry>
5841 <varlistentry>
5842 <term><anchor id="ROOTDIR">root dir (G)</term>
5843 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="ROOTDIRECTORY">
5844 <parameter>root directory"</parameter></link>.</para>
5845 </listitem>
5846 </varlistentry>
5849 <varlistentry>
5850 <term><anchor id="ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory (G)</term>
5851 <listitem><para>The server will <command>chroot()</command> (i.e.
5852 Change it's root directory) to this directory on startup. This is
5853 not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the
5854 server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries.
5855 It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other
5856 parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use ".." in file names
5857 to access other directories (depending on the setting of the <link
5858 linkend="WIDELINKS"><parameter>wide links</parameter></link>
5859 parameter).</para>
5861 <para>Adding a <parameter>root directory</parameter> entry other
5862 than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price. It
5863 absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the
5864 sub-tree specified in the <parameter>root directory</parameter>
5865 option, <emphasis>including</emphasis> some files needed for
5866 complete operation of the server. To maintain full operability
5867 of the server you will need to mirror some system files
5868 into the <parameter>root directory</parameter> tree. In particular
5869 you will need to mirror <filename>/etc/passwd</filename> (or a
5870 subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed for
5871 printing (if required). The set of files that must be mirrored is
5872 operating system dependent.</para>
5874 <para>Default: <command>root directory = /</command></para>
5875 <para>Example: <command>root directory = /homes/smb</command></para>
5876 </listitem>
5877 </varlistentry>
5881 <varlistentry>
5882 <term><anchor id="ROOTPOSTEXEC">root postexec (S)</term>
5883 <listitem><para>This is the same as the <parameter>postexec</parameter>
5884 parameter except that the command is run as root. This
5885 is useful for unmounting filesystems
5886 (such as cdroms) after a connection is closed.</para>
5888 <para>See also <link linkend="POSTEXEC"><parameter>
5889 postexec</parameter></link>.</para>
5891 <para>Default: <command>root postexec = &lt;empty string&gt;
5892 </command></para>
5893 </listitem>
5894 </varlistentry>
5896 <varlistentry>
5897 <term><anchor id="ROOTPREEXEC">root preexec (S)</term>
5898 <listitem><para>This is the same as the <parameter>preexec</parameter>
5899 parameter except that the command is run as root. This
5900 is useful for mounting filesystems (such as cdroms) after a
5901 connection is closed.</para>
5903 <para>See also <link linkend="PREEXEC"><parameter>
5904 preexec</parameter></link> and <link linkend="PREEXECCLOSE">
5905 <parameter>preexec close</parameter></link>.</para>
5907 <para>Default: <command>root preexec = &lt;empty string&gt;
5908 </command></para>
5909 </listitem>
5910 </varlistentry>
5914 <varlistentry>
5915 <term><anchor id="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE">root preexec close (S)</term>
5916 <listitem><para>This is the same as the <parameter>preexec close
5917 </parameter> parameter except that the command is run as root.</para>
5919 <para>See also <link linkend="PREEXEC"><parameter>
5920 preexec</parameter></link> and <link linkend="PREEXECCLOSE">
5921 <parameter>preexec close</parameter></link>.</para>
5923 <para>Default: <command>root preexec close = no</command></para>
5924 </listitem>
5925 </varlistentry>
5928 <varlistentry>
5929 <term><anchor id="SECURITY">security (G)</term>
5930 <listitem><para>This option affects how clients respond to
5931 Samba and is one of the most important settings in the <filename>
5932 smb.conf</filename> file.</para>
5934 <para>The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to
5935 protocol negotiations with <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)
5936 </ulink> to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide
5937 based on this bit whether (and how) to transfer user and password
5938 information to the server.</para>
5941 <para>The default is <command>security = user</command>, as this is
5942 the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and
5943 Windows NT.</para>
5945 <para>The alternatives are <command>security = share</command>,
5946 <command>security = server</command> or <command>security=domain
5947 </command>.</para>
5949 <para>In versions of Samba prior to 2..0, the default was
5950 <command>security = share</command> mainly because that was
5951 the only option at one stage.</para>
5953 <para>There is a bug in WfWg that has relevance to this
5954 setting. When in user or server level security a WfWg client
5955 will totally ignore the password you type in the "connect
5956 drive" dialog box. This makes it very difficult (if not impossible)
5957 to connect to a Samba service as anyone except the user that
5958 you are logged into WfWg as.</para>
5960 <para>If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their
5961 usernames on the UNIX machine then you will want to use
5962 <command>security = user</command>. If you mostly use usernames
5963 that don't exist on the UNIX box then use <command>security =
5964 share</command>.</para>
5966 <para>You should also use <command>security = share</command> if you
5967 want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares). This
5968 is commonly used for a shared printer server. It is more difficult
5969 to setup guest shares with <command>security = user</command>, see
5970 the <link linkend="MAPTOGUEST"><parameter>map to guest</parameter>
5971 </link>parameter for details.</para>
5973 <para>It is possible to use <command>smbd</command> in a <emphasis>
5974 hybrid mode</emphasis> where it is offers both user and share
5975 level security under different <link linkend="NETBIOSALIASES">
5976 <parameter>NetBIOS aliases</parameter></link>. </para>
5978 <para>The different settings will now be explained.</para>
5981 <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSSHARE"><emphasis>SECURITY = SHARE
5982 </emphasis></para>
5984 <para>When clients connect to a share level security server then
5985 need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before
5986 attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients
5987 such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with
5988 a username but no password when talking to a <command>security = share
5989 </command> server). Instead, the clients send authentication information
5990 (passwords) on a per-share basis, at the time they attempt to connect
5991 to that share.</para>
5993 <para>Note that <command>smbd</command> <emphasis>ALWAYS</emphasis>
5994 uses a valid UNIX user to act on behalf of the client, even in
5995 <command>security = share</command> level security.</para>
5997 <para>As clients are not required to send a username to the server
5998 in share level security, <command>smbd</command> uses several
5999 techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf
6000 of the client.</para>
6002 <para>A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given
6003 client password is constructed using the following methods :</para>
6005 <itemizedlist>
6006 <listitem><para>If the <link linkend="GUESTONLY"><parameter>guest
6007 only</parameter></link> parameter is set, then all the other
6008 stages are missed and only the <link linkend="GUESTACCOUNT">
6009 <parameter>guest account</parameter></link> username is checked.
6010 </para></listitem>
6012 <listitem><para>Is a username is sent with the share connection
6013 request, then this username (after mapping - see <link
6014 linkend="USERNAMEMAP"><parameter>username map</parameter></link>),
6015 is added as a potential username.</para></listitem>
6017 <listitem><para>If the client did a previous <emphasis>logon
6018 </emphasis> request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the
6019 username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username.
6020 </para></listitem>
6022 <listitem><para>The name of the service the client requested is
6023 added as a potential username.</para></listitem>
6025 <listitem><para>The NetBIOS name of the client is added to
6026 the list as a potential username.</para></listitem>
6028 <listitem><para>Any users on the <link linkend="USER"><parameter>
6029 user</parameter></link> list are added as potential usernames.
6030 </para></listitem>
6031 </itemizedlist>
6033 <para>If the <parameter>guest only</parameter> parameter is
6034 not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password.
6035 The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the
6036 UNIX user.</para>
6038 <para>If the <parameter>guest only</parameter> parameter is
6039 set, or no username can be determined then if the share is marked
6040 as available to the <parameter>guest account</parameter>, then this
6041 guest user will be used, otherwise access is denied.</para>
6043 <para>Note that it can be <emphasis>very</emphasis> confusing
6044 in share-level security as to which UNIX username will eventually
6045 be used in granting access.</para>
6047 <para>See also the section <link linkend="VALIDATIONSECT">
6048 NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</link>.</para>
6050 <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSUSER"><emphasis>SECURIYT = USER
6051 </emphasis></para>
6053 <para>This is the default security setting in Samba 2.2.
6054 With user-level security a client must first "log=on" with a
6055 valid username and password (which can be mapped using the <link
6056 linkend="USERNAMEMAP"><parameter>username map</parameter></link>
6057 parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the <link linkend="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS">
6058 <parameter>encrypted passwords</parameter></link> parameter) can also
6059 be used in this security mode. Parameters such as <link linkend="USER">
6060 <parameter>user</parameter></link> and <link linkend="GUESTONLY">
6061 <parameter>guest only</parameter></link> if set are then applied and
6062 may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after
6063 the user has been successfully authenticated.</para>
6065 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that the name of the resource being
6066 requested is <emphasis>not</emphasis> sent to the server until after
6067 the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why
6068 guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing
6069 the server to automatically map unknown users into the <link
6070 linkend="GUESTACCOUNT"><parameter>guest account</parameter></link>.
6071 See the <link linkend="MAPTOGUEST"><parameter>map to guest</parameter>
6072 </link> parameter for details on doing this.</para>
6074 <para>See also the section <link linkend="VALIDATIONSECT">
6075 NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</link>.</para>
6077 <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSSERVER"><emphasis>SECURITY = SERVER
6078 </emphasis></para>
6080 <para>In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password
6081 by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this
6082 fails it will revert to <command>security = user</command>, but note
6083 that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot
6084 revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid
6085 <filename>smbpasswd</filename> file to check users against. See the
6086 documentation file in the <filename>docs/</filename> directory
6087 <filename>ENCRYPTION.txt</filename> for details on how to set this
6088 up.</para>
6090 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that from the clients point of
6091 view <command>security = server</command> is the same as <command>
6092 security = user</command>. It only affects how the server deals
6093 with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the
6094 client sees.</para>
6096 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that the name of the resource being
6097 requested is <emphasis>not</emphasis> sent to the server until after
6098 the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why
6099 guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing
6100 the server to automatically map unknown users into the <link
6101 linkend="GUESTACCOUNT"><parameter>guest account</parameter></link>.
6102 See the <link linkend="MAPTOGUEST"><parameter>map to guest</parameter>
6103 </link> parameter for details on doing this.</para>
6105 <para>See also the section <link linkend="VALIDATIONSECT">
6106 NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</link>.</para>
6108 <para>See also the <link linkend="PASSWORDSERVER"><parameter>password
6109 server</parameter></link> parameter and the <link
6110 linkend="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"><parameter>encrypted passwords</parameter>
6111 </link> parameter.</para>
6113 <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"><emphasis>SECURITY = DOMAIN
6114 </emphasis></para>
6116 <para>This mode will only work correctly if <ulink
6117 url="smbpasswd.8.html">smbpasswd(8)</ulink> has been used to add this
6118 machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <link
6119 linkend="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"><parameter>encrypted passwords</parameter>
6120 </link> parameter to be set to <constant>true</constant>. In this
6121 mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing
6122 it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly
6123 the same way that a Windows NT Server would do.</para>
6125 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that a valid UNIX user must still
6126 exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow
6127 Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to.</para>
6129 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that from the clients point
6130 of view <command>security = domain</command> is the same as <command>security = user
6131 </command>. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication,
6132 it does not in any way affect what the client sees.</para>
6134 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that the name of the resource being
6135 requested is <emphasis>not</emphasis> sent to the server until after
6136 the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why
6137 guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing
6138 the server to automatically map unknown users into the <link
6139 linkend="GUESTACCOUNT"><parameter>guest account</parameter></link>.
6140 See the <link linkend="MAPTOGUEST"><parameter>map to guest</parameter>
6141 </link> parameter for details on doing this.</para>
6143 <para><emphasis>BUG:</emphasis> There is currently a bug in the
6144 implementation of <command>security = domain</command> with respect
6145 to multi-byte character set usernames. The communication with a
6146 Domain Controller must be done in UNICODE and Samba currently
6147 does not widen multi-byte user names to UNICODE correctly, thus
6148 a multi-byte username will not be recognized correctly at the
6149 Domain Controller. This issue will be addressed in a future release.</para>
6151 <para>See also the section <link linkend="VALIDATIONSECT">
6152 NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</link>.</para>
6154 <para>See also the <link linkend="PASSWORDSERVER"><parameter>password
6155 server</parameter></link> parameter and the <link
6156 linkend="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"><parameter>encrypted passwords</parameter>
6157 </link> parameter.</para>
6159 <para>Default: <command>security = USER</command></para>
6160 <para>Example: <command>security = DOMAIN</command></para>
6161 </listitem>
6162 </varlistentry>
6166 <varlistentry>
6167 <term><anchor id="SECURITYMASK">security mask (S)</term>
6168 <listitem><para>This parameter controls what UNIX permission
6169 bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating
6170 the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security
6171 dialog box.</para>
6173 <para>This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to
6174 the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in
6175 this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this
6176 mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed
6177 to change.</para>
6179 <para>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same
6180 value as the <link linkend="CREATEMASK"><parameter>create mask
6181 </parameter></link> parameter. To allow a user to modify all the
6182 user/group/world permissions on a file, set this parameter to
6183 0777.</para>
6185 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that users who can access the
6186 Samba server through other means can easily bypass this
6187 restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone
6188 "appliance" systems. Administrators of most normal systems will
6189 probably want to set it to 0777.</para>
6191 <para>See also the <link linkend="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE">
6192 <parameter>force directory security mode</parameter></link>,
6193 <link linkend="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"><parameter>directory
6194 security mask</parameter></link>, <link linkend="FORCESECURITYMODE">
6195 <parameter>force security mode</parameter></link> parameters.</para>
6197 <para>Default: <command>security mask = &lt;same as create mask&gt;
6198 </command></para>
6199 <para>Example: <command>security mask = 0777</command></para>
6200 </listitem>
6201 </varlistentry>
6204 <varlistentry>
6205 <term><anchor id="SERVERSTRING">server string (G)</term>
6206 <listitem><para>This controls what string will show up in the
6207 printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection
6208 in <command>net view"</command>. It can be any string that you wish
6209 to show to your users.</para>
6211 <para>It also sets what will appear in browse lists next
6212 to the machine name.</para>
6214 <para>A <parameter>%v</parameter> will be replaced with the Samba
6215 version number.</para>
6217 <para>A <parameter>%h</parameter> will be replaced with the
6218 hostname.</para>
6220 <para>Default: <command>server string = Samba %v</command></para>
6222 <para>Example: <command>server string = University of GNUs Samba
6223 Server</command></para>
6224 </listitem>
6225 </varlistentry>
6229 <varlistentry>
6230 <term><anchor id="SETDIRECTORY">set directory (S)</term>
6231 <listitem><para>If <command>set directory = no</command>, then
6232 users of the service may not use the setdir command to change
6233 directory.</para>
6235 <para>The <command>setdir</command> command is only implemented
6236 in the Digital Pathworks client. See the Pathworks documentation
6237 for details.</para>
6239 <para>Default: <command>set directory = no</command></para>
6240 </listitem>
6241 </varlistentry>
6246 <varlistentry>
6247 <term><anchor id="SHAREMODES">share modes (S)</term>
6248 <listitem><para>This enables or disables the honoring of
6249 the <parameter>share modes</parameter> during a file open. These
6250 modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access
6251 to a file.</para>
6253 <para>These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so
6254 they are simulated using shared memory, or lock files if your
6255 UNIX doesn't support shared memory (almost all do).</para>
6257 <para>The share modes that are enabled by this option are
6258 <constant>DENY_DOS</constant>, <constant>DENY_ALL</constant>,
6259 <constant>DENY_READ</constant>, <constant>DENY_WRITE</constant>,
6260 <constant>DENY_NONE</constant> and <constant>DENY_FCB</constant>.
6261 </para>
6263 <para>This option gives full share compatibility and enabled
6264 by default.</para>
6266 <para>You should <emphasis>NEVER</emphasis> turn this parameter
6267 off as many Windows applications will break if you do so.</para>
6269 <para>Default: <command>share modes = yes</command></para>
6270 </listitem>
6271 </varlistentry>
6276 <varlistentry>
6277 <term><anchor id="SHORTPRESERVECASE">short preserve case (S)</term>
6278 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls if new files
6279 which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of
6280 suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced
6281 to be the <link linkend="DEFAULTCASE"><parameter>default case
6282 </parameter></link>. This option can be use with <link
6283 linkend="PRESERVECASE"><command>preserve case = yes</command>
6284 </link> to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short
6285 names are lowered. </para>
6287 <para>See the section on <link linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT">
6288 NAME MANGLING</link>.</para>
6290 <para>Default: <command>short preserve case = yes</command></para>
6291 </listitem>
6292 </varlistentry>
6296 <varlistentry>
6297 <term><anchor id="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD">show add printer wizard (G)</term>
6298 <listitem><para>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support
6299 for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will
6300 appear on Samba hosts in the share listing. Normally this folder will
6301 contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW). However, it is
6302 possible to disable this feature regardless of the level of privilege
6303 of the connected user.</para>
6305 <para>Under normal circumstances, the Windows NT/2000 client will
6306 open a handle on the printer server with OpenPrinterEx() asking for
6307 Administrator privileges. If the user does not have administrative
6308 access on the print server (i.e is not root or a member of the
6309 <parameter>printer admin</parameter> group), the OpenPrinterEx()
6310 call fails and the clients another open call with a request for
6311 a lower privilege level. This should succeed, however the APW
6312 icon will not be displayed.</para>
6314 <para>Disabling the <parameter>show add printer wizard</parameter>
6315 parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server
6316 to fail. Thus the APW icon will never be displayed. <emphasis>
6317 Note :</emphasis>This does not prevent the same user from having
6318 administrative privilege on an individual printer.</para>
6320 <para>See also <link linkend="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"><parameter>addprinter
6321 command</parameter></link>, <link linkend="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND">
6322 <parameter>deleteprinter command</parameter></link>, <link
6323 linkend="PRINTERADMIN"><parameter>printer admin</parameter></link></para>
6325 <para>Default :<command>show add printer wizard = yes</command></para>
6326 </listitem>
6327 </varlistentry>
6332 <varlistentry>
6333 <term><anchor id="SMBPASSWDFILE">smb passwd file (G)</term>
6334 <listitem><para>This option sets the path to the encrypted
6335 smbpasswd file. By default the path to the smbpasswd file
6336 is compiled into Samba.</para>
6338 <para>Default: <command>smb passwd file = ${prefix}/private/smbpasswd
6339 </command></para>
6341 <para>Example: <command>smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd
6342 </command></para>
6343 </listitem>
6344 </varlistentry>
6349 <varlistentry>
6350 <term><anchor id="SOCKETADDRESS">socket address (G)</term>
6351 <listitem><para>This option allows you to control what
6352 address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to
6353 support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each
6354 with a different configuration.</para>
6356 <para>By default samba will accept connections on any
6357 address.</para>
6359 <para>Example: <command>socket address = 192.168.2.20</command>
6360 </para>
6361 </listitem>
6362 </varlistentry>
6366 <varlistentry>
6367 <term><anchor id="SOCKETOPTIONS">socket options (G)</term>
6368 <listitem><para>This option allows you to set socket options
6369 to be used when talking with the client.</para>
6371 <para>Socket options are controls on the networking layer
6372 of the operating systems which allow the connection to be
6373 tuned.</para>
6375 <para>This option will typically be used to tune your Samba
6376 server for optimal performance for your local network. There is
6377 no way that Samba can know what the optimal parameters are for
6378 your net, so you must experiment and choose them yourself. We
6379 strongly suggest you read the appropriate documentation for your
6380 operating system first (perhaps <command>man setsockopt</command>
6381 will help).</para>
6383 <para>You may find that on some systems Samba will say
6384 "Unknown socket option" when you supply an option. This means you
6385 either incorrectly typed it or you need to add an include file
6386 to includes.h for your OS. If the latter is the case please
6387 send the patch to <ulink url="mailto:samba@samba.org">
6388 samba@samba.org</ulink>.</para>
6390 <para>Any of the supported socket options may be combined
6391 in any way you like, as long as your OS allows it.</para>
6393 <para>This is the list of socket options currently settable
6394 using this option:</para>
6396 <itemizedlist>
6397 <listitem><para>SO_KEEPALIVE</para></listitem>
6398 <listitem><para>SO_REUSEADDR</para></listitem>
6399 <listitem><para>SO_BROADCAST</para></listitem>
6400 <listitem><para>TCP_NODELAY</para></listitem>
6401 <listitem><para>IPTOS_LOWDELAY</para></listitem>
6402 <listitem><para>IPTOS_THROUGHPUT</para></listitem>
6403 <listitem><para>SO_SNDBUF *</para></listitem>
6404 <listitem><para>SO_RCVBUF *</para></listitem>
6405 <listitem><para>SO_SNDLOWAT *</para></listitem>
6406 <listitem><para>SO_RCVLOWAT *</para></listitem>
6407 </itemizedlist>
6409 <para>Those marked with a <emphasis>'*'</emphasis> take an integer
6410 argument. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable
6411 or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you
6412 don't specify 1 or 0.</para>
6414 <para>To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION=VALUE
6415 for example <command>SO_SNDBUF=8192</command>. Note that you must
6416 not have any spaces before or after the = sign.</para>
6418 <para>If you are on a local network then a sensible option
6419 might be</para>
6420 <para><command>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</command></para>
6422 <para>If you have a local network then you could try:</para>
6423 <para><command>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY</command></para>
6425 <para>If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try
6426 setting IPTOS_THROUGHPUT. </para>
6428 <para>Note that several of the options may cause your Samba
6429 server to fail completely. Use these options with caution!</para>
6431 <para>Default: <command>socket options = TCP_NODELAY</command></para>
6432 <para>Example: <command>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</command></para>
6433 </listitem>
6434 </varlistentry>
6439 <varlistentry>
6440 <term><anchor id="SOURCEENVIRONMENT">source environment (G)</term>
6441 <listitem><para>This parameter causes Samba to set environment
6442 variables as per the content of the file named.</para>
6444 <para>If the value of this parameter starts with a "|" character
6445 then Samba will treat that value as a pipe command to open and
6446 will set the environment variables from the output of the pipe.</para>
6448 <para>The contents of the file or the output of the pipe should
6449 be formatted as the output of the standard Unix <command>env(1)
6450 </command> command. This is of the form :</para>
6451 <para>Example environment entry:</para>
6452 <para><command>SAMBA_NETBIOS_NAME=myhostname</command></para>
6454 <para>Default: <emphasis>No default value</emphasis></para>
6455 <para>Examples: <command>source environment = |/etc/smb.conf.sh
6456 </command></para>
6458 <para>Example: <command>source environment =
6459 /usr/local/smb_env_vars</command></para>
6460 </listitem>
6461 </varlistentry>
6465 <varlistentry>
6466 <term><anchor id="SSL">ssl (G)</term>
6467 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6468 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6469 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6470 given at configure time.</para>
6472 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6473 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6474 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6476 <para>This variable enables or disables the entire SSL mode. If
6477 it is set to <constant>no</constant>, the SSL enabled samba behaves
6478 exactly like the non-SSL samba. If set to <constant>yes</constant>,
6479 it depends on the variables <link linkend="SSLHOSTS"><parameter>
6480 ssl hosts</parameter></link> and <link linkend="SSLHOSTSRESIGN">
6481 <parameter>ssl hosts resign</parameter></link> whether an SSL
6482 connection will be required.</para>
6484 <para>Default: <command>ssl=no</command></para>
6485 </listitem>
6486 </varlistentry>
6490 <varlistentry>
6491 <term><anchor id="SSLCACERTDIR">ssl CA certDir (G)</term>
6492 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6493 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6494 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6495 given at configure time.</para>
6497 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6498 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6499 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6501 <para>This variable defines where to look up the Certification
6502 Authorities. The given directory should contain one file for
6503 each CA that samba will trust. The file name must be the hash
6504 value over the "Distinguished Name" of the CA. How this directory
6505 is set up is explained later in this document. All files within the
6506 directory that don't fit into this naming scheme are ignored. You
6507 don't need this variable if you don't verify client certificates.</para>
6509 <para>Default: <command>ssl CA certDir = /usr/local/ssl/certs
6510 </command></para>
6511 </listitem>
6512 </varlistentry>
6516 <varlistentry>
6517 <term><anchor id="SSLCACERTFILE">ssl CA certFile (G)</term>
6518 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6519 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6520 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6521 given at configure time.</para>
6523 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6524 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6525 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6527 <para>This variable is a second way to define the trusted CAs.
6528 The certificates of the trusted CAs are collected in one big
6529 file and this variable points to the file. You will probably
6530 only use one of the two ways to define your CAs. The first choice is
6531 preferable if you have many CAs or want to be flexible, the second
6532 is preferable if you only have one CA and want to keep things
6533 simple (you won't need to create the hashed file names). You
6534 don't need this variable if you don't verify client certificates.</para>
6536 <para>Default: <command>ssl CA certFile = /usr/local/ssl/certs/trustedCAs.pem
6537 </command></para>
6538 </listitem>
6539 </varlistentry>
6543 <varlistentry>
6544 <term><anchor id="SSLCIPHERS">ssl ciphers (G)</term>
6545 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6546 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6547 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6548 given at configure time.</para>
6550 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6551 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6552 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6554 <para>This variable defines the ciphers that should be offered
6555 during SSL negotiation. You should not set this variable unless
6556 you know what you are doing.</para>
6557 </listitem>
6558 </varlistentry>
6561 <varlistentry>
6562 <term><anchor id="SSLCLIENTCERT">ssl client cert (G)</term>
6563 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6564 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6565 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6566 given at configure time.</para>
6568 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6569 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6570 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6572 <para>The certificate in this file is used by <ulink url="smbclient.1.html">
6573 <command>smbclient(1)</command></ulink> if it exists. It's needed
6574 if the server requires a client certificate.</para>
6576 <para>Default: <command>ssl client cert = /usr/local/ssl/certs/smbclient.pem
6577 </command></para>
6578 </listitem>
6579 </varlistentry>
6583 <varlistentry>
6584 <term><anchor id="SSLCLIENTKEY">ssl client key (G)</term>
6585 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6586 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6587 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6588 given at configure time.</para>
6590 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6591 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6592 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6594 <para>This is the private key for <ulink url="smbclient.1.html">
6595 <command>smbclient(1)</command></ulink>. It's only needed if the
6596 client should have a certificate. </para>
6598 <para>Default: <command>ssl client key = /usr/local/ssl/private/smbclient.pem
6599 </command></para>
6600 </listitem>
6601 </varlistentry>
6605 <varlistentry>
6606 <term><anchor id="SSLCOMPATIBILITY">ssl compatibility (G)</term>
6607 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6608 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6609 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6610 given at configure time.</para>
6612 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6613 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6614 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6616 <para>This variable defines whether SSLeay should be configured
6617 for bug compatibility with other SSL implementations. This is
6618 probably not desirable because currently no clients with SSL
6619 implementations other than SSLeay exist.</para>
6621 <para>Default: <command>ssl compatibility = no</command></para>
6622 </listitem>
6623 </varlistentry>
6626 <varlistentry>
6627 <term><anchor id="SSLHOSTS">ssl hosts (G)</term>
6628 <listitem><para>See <link linkend="SSLHOSTSRESIGN"><parameter>
6629 ssl hosts resign</parameter></link>.</para>
6630 </listitem>
6631 </varlistentry>
6634 <varlistentry>
6635 <term><anchor id="SSLHOSTSRESIGN">ssl hosts resign (G)</term>
6636 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6637 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6638 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6639 given at configure time.</para>
6641 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6642 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6643 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6645 <para>These two variables define whether samba will go
6646 into SSL mode or not. If none of them is defined, samba will
6647 allow only SSL connections. If the <link linkend="SSLHOSTS">
6648 <parameter>ssl hosts</parameter></link> variable lists
6649 hosts (by IP-address, IP-address range, net group or name),
6650 only these hosts will be forced into SSL mode. If the <parameter>
6651 ssl hosts resign</parameter> variable lists hosts, only these
6652 hosts will NOT be forced into SSL mode. The syntax for these two
6653 variables is the same as for the <link linkend="HOSTSALLOW"><parameter>
6654 hosts allow</parameter></link> and <link linkend="HOSTSDENY">
6655 <parameter>hosts deny</parameter></link> pair of variables, only
6656 that the subject of the decision is different: It's not the access
6657 right but whether SSL is used or not. </para>
6659 <para>The example below requires SSL connections from all hosts
6660 outside the local net (which is 192.168.*.*).</para>
6662 <para>Default: <command>ssl hosts = &lt;empty string&gt;</command></para>
6663 <para><command>ssl hosts resign = &lt;empty string&gt;</command></para>
6665 <para>Example: <command>ssl hosts resign = 192.168.</command></para>
6666 </listitem>
6667 </varlistentry>
6671 <varlistentry>
6672 <term><anchor id="SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT">ssl require clientcert (G)</term>
6673 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6674 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6675 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6676 given at configure time.</para>
6678 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6679 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6680 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6682 <para>If this variable is set to <constant>yes</constant>, the
6683 server will not tolerate connections from clients that don't
6684 have a valid certificate. The directory/file given in <link
6685 linkend="SSLCACERTDIR"><parameter>ssl CA certDir</parameter>
6686 </link> and <link linkend="SSLCACERTFILE"><parameter>ssl CA certFile
6687 </parameter></link> will be used to look up the CAs that issued
6688 the client's certificate. If the certificate can't be verified
6689 positively, the connection will be terminated. If this variable
6690 is set to <constant>no</constant>, clients don't need certificates.
6691 Contrary to web applications you really <emphasis>should</emphasis>
6692 require client certificates. In the web environment the client's
6693 data is sensitive (credit card numbers) and the server must prove
6694 to be trustworthy. In a file server environment the server's data
6695 will be sensitive and the clients must prove to be trustworthy.</para>
6697 <para>Default: <command>ssl require clientcert = no</command></para>
6698 </listitem>
6699 </varlistentry>
6703 <varlistentry>
6704 <term><anchor id="SSLREQUIRESERVERCERT">ssl require servercert (G)</term>
6705 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6706 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6707 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6708 given at configure time.</para>
6710 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6711 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6712 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6714 <para>If this variable is set to <constant>yes</constant>, the
6715 <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1)</command>
6716 </ulink> will request a certificate from the server. Same as
6717 <link linkend="SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT"><parameter>ssl require
6718 clientcert</parameter></link> for the server.</para>
6720 <para>Default: <command>ssl require servercert = no</command>
6721 </para>
6722 </listitem>
6723 </varlistentry>
6725 <varlistentry>
6726 <term><anchor id="SSLSERVERCERT">ssl server cert (G)</term>
6727 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6728 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6729 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6730 given at configure time.</para>
6732 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6733 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6734 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6736 <para>This is the file containing the server's certificate.
6737 The server <emphasis>must</emphasis> have a certificate. The
6738 file may also contain the server's private key. See later for
6739 how certificates and private keys are created.</para>
6741 <para>Default: <command>ssl server cert = &lt;empty string&gt;
6742 </command></para>
6743 </listitem>
6744 </varlistentry>
6747 <varlistentry>
6748 <term><anchor id="SSLSERVERKEY">ssl server key (G)</term>
6749 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6750 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6751 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6752 given at configure time.</para>
6754 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6755 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6756 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6758 <para>This file contains the private key of the server. If
6759 this variable is not defined, the key is looked up in the
6760 certificate file (it may be appended to the certificate).
6761 The server <emphasis>must</emphasis> have a private key
6762 and the certificate <emphasis>must</emphasis>
6763 match this private key.</para>
6765 <para>Default: <command>ssl server key = &lt;empty string&gt;
6766 </command></para>
6767 </listitem>
6768 </varlistentry>
6771 <varlistentry>
6772 <term><anchor id="SSLVERSION">ssl version (G)</term>
6773 <listitem><para>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This
6774 is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your
6775 system and the configure option <command>--with-ssl</command> was
6776 given at configure time.</para>
6778 <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that for export control reasons
6779 this code is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> enabled by default in any
6780 current binary version of Samba.</para>
6782 <para>This enumeration variable defines the versions of the
6783 SSL protocol that will be used. <constant>ssl2or3</constant> allows
6784 dynamic negotiation of SSL v2 or v3, <constant>ssl2</constant> results
6785 in SSL v2, <constant>ssl3</constant> results in SSL v3 and
6786 <constant>tls1</constant> results in TLS v1. TLS (Transport Layer
6787 Security) is the new standard for SSL.</para>
6789 <para>Default: <command>ssl version = "ssl2or3"</command></para>
6790 </listitem>
6791 </varlistentry>
6795 <varlistentry>
6796 <term><anchor id="STATCACHE">stat cache (G)</term>
6797 <listitem><para>This parameter determines if <ulink
6798 url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> will use a cache in order to
6799 speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need
6800 to change this parameter.</para>
6802 <para>Default: <command>stat cache = yes</command></para>
6803 </listitem>
6804 </varlistentry>
6806 <varlistentry>
6807 <term><anchor id="STATCACHESIZE">stat cache size (G)</term>
6808 <listitem><para>This parameter determines the number of
6809 entries in the <parameter>stat cache</parameter>. You should
6810 never need to change this parameter.</para>
6812 <para>Default: <command>stat cache size = 50</command></para>
6813 </listitem>
6814 </varlistentry>
6818 <varlistentry>
6819 <term><anchor id="STATUS">status (G)</term>
6820 <listitem><para>This enables or disables logging of connections
6821 to a status file that <ulink url="smbstatus.1.html">smbstatus(1)</ulink>
6822 can read.</para>
6824 <para>With this disabled <command>smbstatus</command> won't be able
6825 to tell you what connections are active. You should never need to
6826 change this parameter.</para>
6828 <para>Default: <command>status = yes</command></para>
6829 </listitem>
6830 </varlistentry>
6834 <varlistentry>
6835 <term><anchor id="STRICTLOCKING">strict locking (S)</term>
6836 <listitem><para>This is a boolean that controls the handling of
6837 file locking in the server. When this is set to <constant>yes</constant>
6838 the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and
6839 deny access if locks exist. This can be slow on some systems.</para>
6841 <para>When strict locking is <constant>no</constant> the server does file
6842 lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them.</para>
6844 <para>Well behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it
6845 is important, so in the vast majority of cases <command>strict
6846 locking = no</command> is preferable.</para>
6848 <para>Default: <command>strict locking = no</command></para>
6849 </listitem>
6850 </varlistentry>
6854 <varlistentry>
6855 <term><anchor id="STRICTSYNC">strict sync (S)</term>
6856 <listitem><para>Many Windows applications (including the Windows
6857 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to
6858 disk with doing a sync to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces
6859 the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that
6860 all outstanding data in kernel disk buffers has been safely stored
6861 onto stable storage. This is very slow and should only be done
6862 rarely. Setting this parameter to <constant>no</constant> (the
6863 default) means that smbd ignores the Windows applications requests for
6864 a sync call. There is only a possibility of losing data if the
6865 operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is
6866 little danger in this default setting. In addition, this fixes many
6867 performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98
6868 explorer shell file copies.</para>
6870 <para>See also the <link linkend="SYNCALWAYS"><parameter>sync
6871 always></parameter></link> parameter.</para>
6873 <para>Default: <command>strict sync = no</command></para>
6874 </listitem>
6875 </varlistentry>
6878 <varlistentry>
6879 <term><anchor id="STRIPDOT">strip dot (G)</term>
6880 <listitem><para>This is a boolean that controls whether to
6881 strip trailing dots off UNIX filenames. This helps with some
6882 CDROMs that have filenames ending in a single dot.</para>
6884 <para>Default: <command>strip dot = no</command></para>
6885 </listitem>
6886 </varlistentry>
6890 <varlistentry>
6891 <term><anchor id="SYNCALWAYS">sync always (S)</term>
6892 <listitem><para>This is a boolean parameter that controls
6893 whether writes will always be written to stable storage before
6894 the write call returns. If this is false then the server will be
6895 guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can
6896 set a bit indicating that a particular write should be synchronous).
6897 If this is true then every write will be followed by a <command>fsync()
6898 </command> call to ensure the data is written to disk. Note that
6899 the <parameter>strict sync</parameter> parameter must be set to
6900 <constant>yes</constant> in order for this parameter to have
6901 any affect.</para>
6903 <para>See also the <link linkend="STRICTSYNC"><parameter>strict
6904 sync</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
6906 <para>Default: <command>sync always = no</command></para>
6907 </listitem>
6908 </varlistentry>
6912 <varlistentry>
6913 <term><anchor id="SYSLOG">syslog (G)</term>
6914 <listitem><para>This parameter maps how Samba debug messages
6915 are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. Samba debug
6916 level zero maps onto syslog <constant>LOG_ERR</constant>, debug
6917 level one maps onto <constant>LOG_WARNING</constant>, debug level
6918 two maps onto <constant>LOG_NOTICE</constant>, debug level three
6919 maps onto LOG_INFO. All higher levels are mapped to <constant>
6920 LOG_DEBUG</constant>.</para>
6922 <para>This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages
6923 to syslog. Only messages with debug level less than this value
6924 will be sent to syslog.</para>
6926 <para>Default: <command>syslog = 1</command></para>
6927 </listitem>
6928 </varlistentry>
6932 <varlistentry>
6933 <term><anchor id="SYSLOGONLY">syslog only (G)</term>
6934 <listitem><para>If this parameter is set then Samba debug
6935 messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to
6936 the debug log files.</para>
6938 <para>Default: <command>syslog only = no</command></para>
6939 </listitem>
6940 </varlistentry>
6944 <varlistentry>
6945 <term><anchor id="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR">template homedir (G)</term>
6946 <listitem><para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> this parameter is
6947 only available in Samba 3.0.</para>
6949 <para>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT
6950 user, the <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">winbindd(8)</ulink> daemon
6951 uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user.
6952 If the string <parameter>%D</parameter> is present it is substituted
6953 with the user's Windows NT domain name. If the string <parameter>%U
6954 </parameter> is present it is substituted with the user's Windows
6955 NT user name.</para>
6957 <para>Default: <command>template homedir = /home/%D/%U</command></para>
6958 </listitem>
6959 </varlistentry>
6963 <varlistentry>
6964 <term><anchor id="TEMPLATESHELL">template shell (G)</term>
6965 <listitem><para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> this parameter is
6966 only available in Samba 3.0.</para>
6968 <para>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT
6969 user, the <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">winbindd(8)</ulink> daemon
6970 uses this parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</para>
6972 <para>Default: <command>template shell = /bin/false</command></para>
6973 </listitem>
6974 </varlistentry>
6978 <varlistentry>
6979 <term><anchor id="TIMEOFFSET">time offset (G)</term>
6980 <listitem><para>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add
6981 to the normal GMT to local time conversion. This is useful if
6982 you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight
6983 saving time handling.</para>
6985 <para>Default: <command>time offset = 0</command></para>
6986 <para>Example: <command>time offset = 60</command></para>
6987 </listitem>
6988 </varlistentry>
6992 <varlistentry>
6993 <term><anchor id="TIMESERVER">time server (G)</term>
6994 <listitem><para>This parameter determines if <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">
6995 nmbd(8)</ulink> advertises itself as a time server to Windows
6996 clients.</para>
6998 <para>Default: <command>time server = no</command></para>
6999 </listitem>
7000 </varlistentry>
7003 <varlistentry>
7004 <term><anchor id="TIMESTAMPLOGS">timestamp logs (G)</term>
7005 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"><parameter>
7006 debug timestamp</parameter></link>.</para>
7007 </listitem>
7008 </varlistentry>
7014 <varlistentry>
7015 <term><anchor id="TOTALPRINTJOBS">total print jobs (G)</term>
7016 <listitem><para>This parameter accepts an integer value which defines
7017 a limit on the maximum number of print jobs that will be accepted
7018 system wide at any given time. If a print job is submitted
7019 by a client which will exceed this number, then smbd will return an
7020 error indicating that no space is available on the server. The
7021 default value of 0 means that no such limit exists. This parameter
7022 can be used to prevent a server from exceeding its capacity and is
7023 designed as a printing throttle. See also
7024 <link linkend="MAXPRINTJOBS"><parameter>max print jobs</parameter</link>.
7025 </para>
7027 <para>Default: <command>total print jobs = 0</command></para>
7028 <para>Example: <command>total print jobs = 5000</command></para>
7029 </listitem>
7030 </varlistentry>
7035 <varlistentry>
7036 <term><anchor id="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC">unix password sync (G)</term>
7037 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba
7038 attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password
7039 when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed.
7040 If this is set to true the program specified in the <parameter>passwd
7041 program</parameter>parameter is called <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis> -
7042 to allow the new UNIX password to be set without access to the
7043 old UNIX password (as the SMB password has change code has no
7044 access to the old password cleartext, only the new).</para>
7046 <para>See also <link linkend="PASSWDPROGRAM"><parameter>passwd
7047 program</parameter></link>, <link linkend="PASSWDCHAT"><parameter>
7048 passwd chat</parameter></link>.</para>
7050 <para>Default: <command>unix password sync = no</command></para>
7051 </listitem>
7052 </varlistentry>
7056 <varlistentry>
7057 <term><anchor id="UPDATEENCRYPTED">update encrypted (G)</term>
7058 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter allows a user logging
7059 on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed)
7060 password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as
7061 they log on. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext
7062 password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext
7063 password over the wire, and are checked against a UNIX account
7064 database) to encrypted password authentication (the SMB
7065 challenge/response authentication mechanism) without forcing
7066 all users to re-enter their passwords via smbpasswd at the time the
7067 change is made. This is a convenience option to allow the change over
7068 to encrypted passwords to be made over a longer period. Once all users
7069 have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd
7070 file this parameter should be set to <constant>no</constant>.</para>
7072 <para>In order for this parameter to work correctly the <link
7073 linkend="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"><parameter>encrypt passwords</parameter>
7074 </link> parameter must be set to <constant>no</constant> when
7075 this parameter is set to <constant>yes</constant>.</para>
7077 <para>Note that even when this parameter is set a user
7078 authenticating to <command>smbd</command> must still enter a valid
7079 password in order to connect correctly, and to update their hashed
7080 (smbpasswd) passwords.</para>
7082 <para>Default: <command>update encrypted = no</command></para>
7083 </listitem>
7084 </varlistentry>
7088 <varlistentry>
7089 <term><anchor id="USERHOSTS">use rhosts (G)</term>
7090 <listitem><para>If this global parameter is a true, it specifies
7091 that the UNIX users <filename>.rhosts</filename> file in their home directory
7092 will be read to find the names of hosts and users who will be allowed
7093 access without specifying a password.</para>
7095 <para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> The use of <parameter>use rhosts
7096 </parameter> can be a major security hole. This is because you are
7097 trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to
7098 get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the <parameter>
7099 use rhosts</parameter> option be only used if you really know what
7100 you are doing.</para>
7102 <para>Default: <command>use rhosts = no</command></para>
7103 </listitem>
7104 </varlistentry>
7108 <varlistentry>
7109 <term><anchor id="USER">user (S)</term>
7110 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="USERNAME"><parameter>
7111 username</parameter></link>.</para>
7112 </listitem>
7113 </varlistentry>
7117 <varlistentry>
7118 <term><anchor id="USERS">users (S)</term>
7119 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="USERNAME"><parameter>
7120 username</parameter></link>.</para>
7121 </listitem>
7122 </varlistentry>
7125 <varlistentry>
7126 <term><anchor id="USERNAME">username (S)</term>
7127 <listitem><para>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited
7128 list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against
7129 each username in turn (left to right).</para>
7131 <para>The <parameter>username</parameter> line is needed only when
7132 the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case
7133 for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg
7134 usernames to UNIX usernames. In both these cases you may also be
7135 better using the \\server\share%user syntax instead.</para>
7137 <para>The <parameter>username</parameter> line is not a great
7138 solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate
7139 the supplied password against each of the usernames in the
7140 <parameter>username</parameter> line in turn. This is slow and
7141 a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords.
7142 You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter
7143 unwisely.</para>
7145 <para>Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security. This
7146 parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints
7147 to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the
7148 supplied password. Users can login as whoever they please and
7149 they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a
7150 telnet session. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as,
7151 so they cannot do anything that user cannot do.</para>
7153 <para>To restrict a service to a particular set of users you
7154 can use the <link linkend="VALIDUSERS"><parameter>valid users
7155 </parameter></link> parameter.</para>
7157 <para>If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name
7158 will be looked up first in the yp netgroups list (if Samba
7159 is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in
7160 the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users
7161 in the group of that name.</para>
7163 <para>If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name
7164 will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will
7165 expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.</para>
7167 <para>If any of the usernames begin with a '&'then the name
7168 will be looked up only in the yp netgroups database (if Samba
7169 is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list
7170 of all users in the netgroup group of that name.</para>
7172 <para>Note that searching though a groups database can take
7173 quite some time, and some clients may time out during the
7174 search.</para>
7176 <para>See the section <link linkend="VALIDATIONSECT">NOTE ABOUT
7177 USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</link> for more information on how
7178 this parameter determines access to the services.</para>
7180 <para>Default: <command>The guest account if a guest service,
7181 else &lt;empty string&gt;.</command></para>
7183 <para>Examples:<command>username = fred, mary, jack, jane,
7184 @users, @pcgroup</command></para>
7185 </listitem>
7186 </varlistentry>
7190 <varlistentry>
7191 <term><anchor id="USERNAMELEVEL">username level (G)</term>
7192 <listitem><para>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at
7193 the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase
7194 username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the
7195 username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the
7196 username is not found on the UNIX machine.</para>
7198 <para>If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes.
7199 This parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase
7200 combinations to try while trying to determine the UNIX user name. The
7201 higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower
7202 the discovery of usernames will be. Use this parameter when you have
7203 strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as <constant>AstrangeUser
7204 </constant>.</para>
7206 <para>Default: <command>username level = 0</command></para>
7207 <para>Example: <command>username level = 5</command></para>
7208 </listitem>
7209 </varlistentry>
7213 <varlistentry>
7214 <term><anchor id="USERNAMEMAP">username map (G)</term>
7215 <listitem><para>This option allows you to specify a file containing
7216 a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server. This can be
7217 used for several purposes. The most common is to map usernames
7218 that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX
7219 box uses. The other is to map multiple users to a single username
7220 so that they can more easily share files.</para>
7222 <para>The map file is parsed line by line. Each line should
7223 contain a single UNIX username on the left then a '=' followed
7224 by a list of usernames on the right. The list of usernames on the
7225 right may contain names of the form @group in which case they
7226 will match any UNIX username in that group. The special client
7227 name '*' is a wildcard and matches any name. Each line of the
7228 map file may be up to 1023 characters long.</para>
7230 <para>The file is processed on each line by taking the
7231 supplied username and comparing it with each username on the right
7232 hand side of the '=' signs. If the supplied name matches any of
7233 the names on the right hand side then it is replaced with the name
7234 on the left. Processing then continues with the next line.</para>
7236 <para>If any line begins with a '#' or a ';' then it is
7237 ignored</para>
7239 <para>If any line begins with an '!' then the processing
7240 will stop after that line if a mapping was done by the line.
7241 Otherwise mapping continues with every line being processed.
7242 Using '!' is most useful when you have a wildcard mapping line
7243 later in the file.</para>
7245 <para>For example to map from the name <constant>admin</constant>
7246 or <constant>administrator</constant> to the UNIX name <constant>
7247 root</constant> you would use:</para>
7249 <para><command>root = admin administrator</command></para>
7251 <para>Or to map anyone in the UNIX group <constant>system</constant>
7252 to the UNIX name <constant>sys</constant> you would use:</para>
7254 <para><command>sys = @system</command></para>
7256 <para>You can have as many mappings as you like in a username
7257 map file.</para>
7260 <para>If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then
7261 the netgroup database is checked before the <filename>/etc/group
7262 </filename> database for matching groups.</para>
7264 <para>You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them
7265 by using double quotes around the name. For example:</para>
7267 <para><command>tridge = "Andrew Tridgell"</command></para>
7269 <para>would map the windows username "Andrew Tridgell" to the
7270 unix username "tridge".</para>
7272 <para>The following example would map mary and fred to the
7273 unix user sys, and map the rest to guest. Note the use of the
7274 '!' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on
7275 that line.</para>
7277 <para><programlisting>
7278 !sys = mary fred
7279 guest = *
7280 </programlisting></para>
7282 <para>Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences
7283 of usernames. Thus if you connect to \\server\fred and <constant>
7284 fred</constant> is remapped to <constant>mary</constant> then you
7285 will actually be connecting to \\server\mary and will need to
7286 supply a password suitable for <constant>mary</constant> not
7287 <constant>fred</constant>. The only exception to this is the
7288 username passed to the <link linkend="PASSWORDSERVER"><parameter>
7289 password server</parameter></link> (if you have one). The password
7290 server will receive whatever username the client supplies without
7291 modification.</para>
7293 <para>Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect
7294 this has is with printing. Users who have been mapped may have
7295 trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think
7296 they don't own the print job.</para>
7298 <para>Default: <emphasis>no username map</emphasis></para>
7299 <para>Example: <command>username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map
7300 </command></para>
7301 </listitem>
7302 </varlistentry>
7306 <varlistentry>
7307 <term><anchor id="UTMP">utmp (S)</term>
7308 <listitem><para>This boolean parameter is only available if
7309 Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <command>
7310 --with-utmp</command>. If set to True then Samba will attempt
7311 to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a
7312 connection is made to a Samba server. Sites may use this to record the
7313 user connecting to a Samba share.</para>
7315 <para>See also the <link linkend="UTMPDIRECTORY"><parameter>
7316 utmp directory</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
7318 <para>Default: <command>utmp = no</command></para>
7319 </listitem>
7320 </varlistentry>
7324 <varlistentry>
7325 <term><anchor id="UTMPDIRECTORY">utmp directory(G)</term>
7326 <listitem><para>This parameter is only available if Samba has
7327 been configured and compiled with the option <command>
7328 --with-utmp</command>. It specifies a directory pathname that is
7329 used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that
7330 record user connections to a Samba server. See also the <link linkend="UTMP">
7331 <parameter>utmp</parameter></link> parameter. By default this is
7332 not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the
7333 native system is set to use (usually
7334 <filename>/var/run/utmp</filename> on Linux).</para>
7336 <para>Default: <emphasis>no utmp directory</emphasis></para>
7337 </listitem>
7338 </varlistentry>
7342 <varlistentry>
7343 <term><anchor id="VALIDCHARS">valid chars (G)</term>
7344 <listitem><para>The option allows you to specify additional
7345 characters that should be considered valid by the server in
7346 filenames. This is particularly useful for national character
7347 sets, such as adding u-umlaut or a-ring.</para>
7349 <para>The option takes a list of characters in either integer
7350 or character form with spaces between them. If you give two
7351 characters with a colon between them then it will be taken as
7352 an lowercase:uppercase pair.</para>
7354 <para>If you have an editor capable of entering the characters
7355 into the config file then it is probably easiest to use this
7356 method. Otherwise you can specify the characters in octal,
7357 decimal or hexadecimal form using the usual C notation.</para>
7359 <para>For example to add the single character 'Z' to the charset
7360 (which is a pointless thing to do as it's already there) you could
7361 do one of the following</para>
7363 <para><programlisting>
7364 valid chars = Z
7365 valid chars = z:Z
7366 valid chars = 0132:0172
7367 </programlisting></para>
7369 <para>The last two examples above actually add two characters,
7370 and alter the uppercase and lowercase mappings appropriately.</para>
7372 <para>Note that you <emphasis>MUST</emphasis> specify this parameter
7373 after the <parameter>client code page</parameter> parameter if you
7374 have both set. If <parameter>client code page</parameter> is set after
7375 the <parameter>valid chars</parameter> parameter the <parameter>valid
7376 chars</parameter> settings will be overwritten.</para>
7378 <para>See also the <link linkend="CLIENTCODEPAGE"><parameter>client
7379 code page</parameter></link> parameter.</para>
7381 <para>Default: <emphasis>Samba defaults to using a reasonable set
7382 of valid characters for English systems</emphasis></para>
7384 <para>Example: <command>valid chars = 0345:0305 0366:0326 0344:0304
7385 </command></para>
7387 <para>The above example allows filenames to have the Swedish
7388 characters in them.</para>
7390 <para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> It is actually quite difficult to
7391 correctly produce a <parameter>valid chars</parameter> line for
7392 a particular system. To automate the process <ulink
7393 url="mailto:tino@augsburg.net">tino@augsburg.net</ulink> has written
7394 a package called <command>validchars</command> which will automatically
7395 produce a complete <parameter>valid chars</parameter> line for
7396 a given client system. Look in the <filename>examples/validchars/
7397 </filename> subdirectory of your Samba source code distribution
7398 for this package.</para>
7399 </listitem>
7400 </varlistentry>
7404 <varlistentry>
7405 <term><anchor id="VALIDUSERS">valid users (S)</term>
7406 <listitem><para>This is a list of users that should be allowed
7407 to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&'
7408 are interpreted using the same rules as described in the
7409 <parameter>invalid users</parameter> parameter.</para>
7411 <para>If this is empty (the default) then any user can login.
7412 If a username is in both this list and the <parameter>invalid
7413 users</parameter> list then access is denied for that user.</para>
7415 <para>The current servicename is substituted for <parameter>%S
7416 </parameter>. This is useful in the [homes] section.</para>
7418 <para>See also <link linkend="INVALIDUSERS"><parameter>invalid users
7419 </parameter></link></para>
7421 <para>Default: <emphasis>No valid users list (anyone can login)
7422 </emphasis></para>
7424 <para>Example: <command>valid users = greg, @pcusers</command></para>
7425 </listitem>
7426 </varlistentry>
7431 <varlistentry>
7432 <term><anchor id="VETOFILES">veto files(S)</term>
7433 <listitem><para>This is a list of files and directories that
7434 are neither visible nor accessible. Each entry in the list must
7435 be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included
7436 in the entry. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files
7437 or directories as in DOS wildcards.</para>
7439 <para>Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and
7440 must <emphasis>not</emphasis> include the unix directory
7441 separator '/'.</para>
7443 <para>Note that the <parameter>case sensitive</parameter> option
7444 is applicable in vetoing files.</para>
7446 <para>One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important
7447 to be aware of, is that if a directory contains nothing but files
7448 that match the veto files parameter (which means that Windows/DOS
7449 clients cannot ever see them) is deleted, the veto files within
7450 that directory <emphasis>are automatically deleted</emphasis> along
7451 with it, if the user has UNIX permissions to do so.</para>
7453 <para>Setting this parameter will affect the performance
7454 of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories
7455 for a match as they are scanned.</para>
7457 <para>See also <link linkend="HIDEFILES"><parameter>hide files
7458 </parameter></link> and <link linkend="CASESENSITIVE"><parameter>
7459 case sensitive</parameter></link>.</para>
7461 <para>Default: <emphasis>No files or directories are vetoed.
7462 </emphasis></para>
7464 <para>Examples:<programlisting>
7465 ; Veto any files containing the word Security,
7466 ; any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the
7467 ; word root.
7468 veto files = /*Security*/*.tmp/*root*/
7470 ; Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server
7471 ; creates.
7472 veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/
7473 </programlisting></para>
7474 </listitem>
7475 </varlistentry>
7478 <varlistentry>
7479 <term><anchor id="VETOOPLOCKFILES">veto oplock files (S)</term>
7480 <listitem><para>This parameter is only valid when the <link
7481 linkend="OPLOCKS"><parameter>oplocks</parameter></link>
7482 parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator
7483 to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that
7484 match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the
7485 <link linkend="VETOFILES"><parameter>veto files</parameter></link>
7486 parameter.</para>
7488 <para>Default: <emphasis>No files are vetoed for oplock
7489 grants</emphasis></para>
7491 <para>You might want to do this on files that you know will
7492 be heavily contended for by clients. A good example of this
7493 is in the NetBench SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy
7494 client contention for files ending in <filename>.SEM</filename>.
7495 To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these files you would use
7496 the line (either in the [global] section or in the section for
7497 the particular NetBench share :</para>
7499 <para>Example: <command>veto oplock files = /*;.SEM/
7500 </command></para>
7501 </listitem>
7502 </varlistentry>
7506 <varlistentry>
7507 <term><anchor id="VFSOBJECT">vfs object (S)</term>
7508 <listitem><para>This parameter specifies a shared object file that
7509 is used for Samba VFS I/O operations. By default, normal
7510 disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded
7511 with a VFS object. The Samba VFS layer is new to Samba 2.2 and
7512 must be enabled at compile time with --with-vfs.</para>
7514 <para>Default : <emphasis>no value</emphasis></para>
7515 </listitem>
7516 </varlistentry>
7521 <varlistentry>
7522 <term><anchor id="VFSOPTIONS">vfs options (S)</term>
7523 <listitem><para>This parameter allows parameters to be passed
7524 to the vfs layer at initialisation time. The Samba VFS layer
7525 is new to Samba 2.2 and must be enabled at compile time
7526 with --with-vfs. See also <link linkend="VFSOBJECT"><parameter>
7527 vfs object</parameter></link>.</para>
7529 <para>Default : <emphasis>no value</emphasis></para>
7530 </listitem>
7531 </varlistentry>
7535 <varlistentry>
7536 <term><anchor id="VOLUME">volume (S)</term>
7537 <listitem><para> This allows you to override the volume label
7538 returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs
7539 that insist on a particular volume label.</para>
7541 <para>Default: <emphasis>the name of the share</emphasis></para>
7542 </listitem>
7543 </varlistentry>
7547 <varlistentry>
7548 <term><anchor id="WIDELINKS">wide links (S)</term>
7549 <listitem><para>This parameter controls whether or not links
7550 in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links
7551 that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the
7552 server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only
7553 to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported.</para>
7555 <para>Note that setting this parameter can have a negative
7556 effect on your server performance due to the extra system calls
7557 that Samba has to do in order to perform the link checks.</para>
7559 <para>Default: <command>wide links = yes</command></para>
7560 </listitem>
7561 </varlistentry>
7566 <varlistentry>
7567 <term><anchor id="WINBINDCACHETIME">winbind cache time</term>
7568 <listitem><para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> this parameter is only
7569 available in Samba 3.0.</para>
7571 <para>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the
7572 <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">winbindd(8)</ulink> daemon will cache
7573 user and group information before querying a Windows NT server
7574 again.</para>
7576 <para>Default: <command>winbind cache type = 15</command></para>
7577 </listitem>
7578 </varlistentry>
7583 <varlistentry>
7584 <term><anchor id="WINBINDGID">winbind gid</term>
7585 <listitem><para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> this parameter is only
7586 available in Samba 3.0.</para>
7588 <para>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group
7589 ids that are allocated by the <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">
7590 winbindd(8)</ulink> daemon. This range of group ids should have no
7591 existing local or nis groups within it as strange conflicts can
7592 occur otherwise.</para>
7594 <para>Default: <command>winbind gid = &lt;empty string&gt;
7595 </command></para>
7597 <para>Example: <command>winbind gid = 10000-20000</command></para>
7598 </listitem>
7599 </varlistentry>
7602 <varlistentry>
7603 <term><anchor id="WINBINDSEPARATOR">winbind separator</term>
7604 <listitem><para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> this parameter is only
7605 available in Samba 3.0.</para>
7607 <para>This parameter allows an admin to define the character
7608 used when listing a username of the form of <replaceable>DOMAIN
7609 </replaceable>\<replaceable>user</replaceable>. This parameter
7610 is only applicable when using the <filename>pam_winbind.so</filename>
7611 and <filename>nss_winbind.so</filename> modules for UNIX services.
7612 </para>
7614 <para>Example: <command>winbind separator = \</command></para>
7615 <para>Example: <command>winbind separator = +</command></para>
7616 </listitem>
7617 </varlistentry>
7622 <varlistentry>
7623 <term><anchor id="WINBINDUID">winbind uid</term>
7624 <listitem><para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> this parameter is only
7625 available in Samba 3.0.</para>
7627 <para>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group
7628 ids that are allocated by the <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">
7629 winbindd(8)</ulink> daemon. This range of ids should have no
7630 existing local or nis users within it as strange conflicts can
7631 occur otherwise.</para>
7633 <para>Default: <command>winbind uid = &lt;empty string&gt;
7634 </command></para>
7636 <para>Example: <command>winbind uid = 10000-20000</command></para>
7637 </listitem>
7638 </varlistentry>
7644 <varlistentry>
7645 <term><anchor id="WINSHOOK">wins hook (G)</term>
7646 <listitem><para>When Samba is running as a WINS server this
7647 allows you to call an external program for all changes to the
7648 WINS database. The primary use for this option is to allow the
7649 dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as
7650 dynamic DNS.</para>
7652 <para>The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script
7653 or executable that will be called as follows:</para>
7655 <para><command>wins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list
7656 </command></para>
7658 <itemizedlist>
7659 <listitem><para>The first argument is the operation and is one
7660 of "add", "delete", or "refresh". In most cases the operation can
7661 be ignored as the rest of the parameters provide sufficient
7662 information. Note that "refresh" may sometimes be called when the
7663 name has not previously been added, in that case it should be treated
7664 as an add.</para></listitem>
7666 <listitem><para>The second argument is the netbios name. If the
7667 name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called.
7668 Legal names contain only letters, digits, hyphens, underscores
7669 and periods.</para></listitem>
7671 <listitem><para>The third argument is the netbios name
7672 type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number. </para></listitem>
7674 <listitem><para>The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live)
7675 for the name in seconds.</para></listitem>
7677 <listitem><para>The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP
7678 addresses currently registered for that name. If this list is
7679 empty then the name should be deleted.</para></listitem>
7680 </itemizedlist>
7682 <para>An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update
7683 program <command>nsupdate</command> is provided in the examples
7684 directory of the Samba source code. </para>
7685 </listitem>
7686 </varlistentry>
7692 <varlistentry>
7693 <term><anchor id="WINSPROXY">wins proxy (G)</term>
7694 <listitem><para>This is a boolean that controls if <ulink
7695 url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> will respond to broadcast name
7696 queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to set this
7697 to <constant>yes</constant> for some older clients.</para>
7699 <para>Default: <command>wins proxy = no</command></para>
7700 </listitem>
7701 </varlistentry>
7706 <varlistentry>
7707 <term><anchor id="WINSSERVER">wins server (G)</term>
7708 <listitem><para>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP
7709 address for preference) of the WINS server that <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">
7710 nmbd(8)</ulink> should register with. If you have a WINS server on
7711 your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</para>
7713 <para>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a
7714 multi-subnetted network.</para>
7716 <para><emphasis>NOTE</emphasis>. You need to set up Samba to point
7717 to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet
7718 browsing to work correctly.</para>
7720 <para>See the documentation file <filename>BROWSING.txt</filename>
7721 in the docs/ directory of your Samba source distribution.</para>
7723 <para>Default: <emphasis>not enabled</emphasis></para>
7724 <para>Example: <command>wins server = 192.9.200.1</command></para>
7725 </listitem>
7726 </varlistentry>
7730 <varlistentry>
7731 <term><anchor id="WINSSUPPORT">wins support (G)</term>
7732 <listitem><para>This boolean controls if the <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">
7733 nmbd(8)</ulink> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should
7734 not set this to true unless you have a multi-subnetted network and
7735 you wish a particular <command>nmbd</command> to be your WINS server.
7736 Note that you should <emphasis>NEVER</emphasis> set this to true
7737 on more than one machine in your network.</para>
7739 <para>Default: <command>wins support = no</command></para>
7740 </listitem>
7741 </varlistentry>
7745 <varlistentry>
7746 <term><anchor id="WORKGROUP">workgroup (G)</term>
7747 <listitem><para>This controls what workgroup your server will
7748 appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter
7749 also controls the Domain name used with the <link
7750 linkend="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"><command>security=domain</command></link>
7751 setting.</para>
7753 <para>Default: <emphasis>set at compile time to WORKGROUP</emphasis></para>
7754 <para>Example: <command>workgroup = MYGROUP</command></para>
7755 </listitem>
7756 </varlistentry>
7761 <varlistentry>
7762 <term><anchor id="WRITABLE">writable (S)</term>
7763 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="WRITEABLE"><parameter>
7764 writeable</parameter></link> for people who can't spell :-).</para>
7765 </listitem>
7766 </varlistentry>
7770 <varlistentry>
7771 <term><anchor id="WRITECACHESIZE">write cache size (S)</term>
7772 <listitem><para>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value,
7773 Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file
7774 (it does <emphasis>not</emphasis> do this for
7775 non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request
7776 to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible.
7777 The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset
7778 would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client.
7779 Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is stored
7780 within it.</para>
7782 <para>This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more
7783 efficient write size for RAID disks (ie. writes may be tuned to
7784 be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems
7785 where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free
7786 memory for userspace programs.</para>
7788 <para>The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache
7789 (per oplocked file) in bytes.</para>
7791 <para>Default: <command>write cache size = 0</command></para>
7792 <para>Example: <command>write cache size = 262144</command></para>
7794 <para>for a 256k cache size per file.</para>
7795 </listitem>
7796 </varlistentry>
7802 <varlistentry>
7803 <term><anchor id="WRITELIST">write list (S)</term>
7804 <listitem><para>This is a list of users that are given read-write
7805 access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then
7806 they will be given write access, no matter what the <link
7807 linkend="WRITEABLE"><parameter>writeable</parameter></link>
7808 option is set to. The list can include group names using the
7809 @group syntax.</para>
7811 <para>Note that if a user is in both the read list and the
7812 write list then they will be given write access.</para>
7814 <para>See also the <link linkend="READLIST"><parameter>read list
7815 </parameter></link> option.</para>
7817 <para>Default: <command>write list = &lt;empty string&gt;
7818 </command></para>
7820 <para>Example: <command>write list = admin, root, @staff
7821 </command></para>
7822 </listitem>
7823 </varlistentry>
7829 <varlistentry>
7830 <term><anchor id="WRITEOK">write ok (S)</term>
7831 <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="WRITEABLE"><parameter>
7832 writeable</parameter></link>.</para>
7833 </listitem>
7834 </varlistentry>
7838 <varlistentry>
7839 <term><anchor id="WRITERAW">write raw (G)</term>
7840 <listitem><para>This parameter controls whether or not the server
7841 will support raw writes SMB's when transferring data from clients.
7842 You should never need to change this parameter.</para>
7844 <para>Default: <command>write raw = yes</command></para>
7845 </listitem>
7846 </varlistentry>
7850 <varlistentry>
7851 <term><anchor id="WRITEABLE">writeable (S)</term>
7852 <listitem><para>An inverted synonym is <link linkend="READONLY">
7853 <parameter>read only</parameter></link>.</para>
7855 <para>If this parameter is <constant>no</constant>, then users
7856 of a service may not create or modify files in the service's
7857 directory.</para>
7859 <para>Note that a printable service (<command>printable = yes</command>)
7860 will <emphasis>ALWAYS</emphasis> allow writing to the directory
7861 (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations.</para>
7863 <para>Default: <command>writeable = no</command></para>
7864 </listitem>
7865 </varlistentry>
7868 </variablelist>
7870 </refsect1>
7872 <refsect1>
7873 <title>WARNINGS</title>
7875 <para>Although the configuration file permits service names
7876 to contain spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will
7877 be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a
7878 problem - but be aware of the possibility.</para>
7880 <para>On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients -
7881 limit service names to eight characters. <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)
7882 </ulink> has no such limitation, but attempts to connect from such
7883 clients will fail if they truncate the service names. For this reason
7884 you should probably keep your service names down to eight characters
7885 in length.</para>
7887 <para>Use of the [homes] and [printers] special sections make life
7888 for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default
7889 attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care when designing these
7890 sections. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool
7891 directories are correct.</para>
7892 </refsect1>
7894 <refsect1>
7895 <title>VERSION</title>
7897 <para>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of
7898 the Samba suite.</para>
7899 </refsect1>
7901 <refsect1>
7902 <title>SEE ALSO</title>
7903 <para><ulink url="samba.7.html">samba(7)</ulink>,
7904 <ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command>smbpasswd(8)</command></ulink>,
7905 <ulink url="swat.8.html"><command>swat(8)</command></ulink>,
7906 <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>,
7907 <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command>nmbd(8)</command></ulink>,
7908 <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1)</command></ulink>,
7909 <ulink url="nmblookup.1.html"><command>nmblookup(1)</command></ulink>,
7910 <ulink url="testparm.1.html"><command>testparm(1)</command></ulink>,
7911 <ulink url="testprns.1.html"><command>testprns(1)</command></ulink>
7912 </para>
7913 </refsect1>
7915 <refsect1>
7916 <title>AUTHOR</title>
7918 <para>The original Samba software and related utilities
7919 were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed
7920 by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar
7921 to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</para>
7923 <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer.
7924 The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another
7925 excellent piece of Open Source software, available at
7926 <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/">
7927 ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0
7928 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for
7929 Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para>
7930 </refsect1>
7932 </refentry>